Chevrolet Trans Sport 1994 Owner's Manual

Add to my manuals
306 Pages

advertisement

Chevrolet Trans Sport 1994 Owner's Manual | Manualzz
-.
i
!
--.
7
1994 Owner’s Manual
Pontiac Trans Sport
Introduction
Part
I
Part
2
Part
3
Part
4
Part
5
Part
6
Part
7
Part
8
Table of Contents
............. 3G
Seats & RestraintSystems ........... 7e
Features & Controls ............... 53 e
Comfort Controls & Audio Systems . 119
Your Driving and the Road .........
Problemson the Road ............. 175 1
Service & Appearance Care ........ 205 y
MaintenanceSchedule ............ 255 r
CustomerAssistanceInformation .. 273 L
Index ...........................
297 a
Service Station Information .. Last Page
HOWto Use this Manual
Includes “Reporting Safety Defects” onpage 277.
part9
~~
Printed in USA
10260060 A
Second Edition . . .
Important Notes About this Manual
Please keep this manual in your Pontiac, so it will be there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you sell the
vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product
after that time without further notice.
Note to Canadian Owners
For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute thename “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Pontiac Motor Division
whenever it appears in this manual.
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a French Language Manual:
Aux propriktaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ceguide en fraqais chez votre concessionaire
ou au DGN Marketing Services Ltd., 1500 Bonhill Rd., Mississauga, Ontario L5T lC7.
Published by Pontiac Motor Division
General Motors Corporation
The *ord Pontiac, the Pontiac Emblem and the name
Trans Sport are registered trademarksof General
Motors Corporation.
The word Delco is a registered trademarkof General
Motors Corporation.
@
m . .
2
Copyright 1993 General Motors Corporation, Pontiac Motor Division. All rights reserved.
How to Use this Manual
Using Your 1994 Pontiac
Owner’s Manual
Part 3: Comfort Controls & Audio
Systems
This part tells you how to adjust the
ventilation and comfort controls and how
to operate your sound system.
Part 8: Customer Assistance
Information
This part tells you how to contact Pontiac
Many people read theirowner’s manual
for assistance and how to get service
from beginning to end when they first
publications. It also gives you information
receive their new vehicle. Thiswill help
on “Reporting Safety Defects’’ on page
you learn about the features and controls Part 4: Your Driving and the Road
277.
for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll
Here you’ll find helpful information and
Part 9: Index
find that pictures and words work
tips about the road and how to drive under
together to explain things quickly.
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost
different conditions.
every subject in this manual. You can use it
There are nine parts with black-tabbed
Part 5: Problems on the Road
to quickly find something you want to read.
pages in this manual. Each part begins
This part tells you what to do if you have Service Station Information
with a brief list of contents,so you can
3 problem while driving, such as a flat tire
usually tell ata glance if that part contains
This is a quick reference of service
3r engine overheating.
the information you want.
information. You can find it on the last
Part 6: Services & Appearance Care
page of this manual.
You can bend the manual slightly to reveal
Here
the
manual
tells
you
how
to
keep
the black tabs that help you finda part.
your Pontiac running properly and
looking good.
Part 1: Seats & Restraint Systems
Part 7: Maintenance Schedule
This part tells you how to use yourseats
and safety belts properly. It also explains This part tells you when to perform
the “SIR” (Air Bag) System.
vehicle maintenance and what fluids and
lubricants to use.
Part 2: Features & Controls
This part explains how to start and
operate your Pontiac.
d...
How to Use this Manual
You will also find a circle with a slash
Safety Warnings and
Symbols
ihrough it in this book. This safety
symbol means:
You will find a number of safety cautions
in this book. We use a box with gray
background and the word CAUTION to
tell you about things that could hurt you if
you were to ignore the warning.
“Don’t,”
“Don’t do this,”
or “Don’t let this happen.”
In the gray caution area, we tell you what
the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do
to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please
read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these
notices:
NOTICE:
These mean there is something that
could damage your vehicle.
In the notice area, we tell you about
something that can damage your vehicle.
Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be
costly. But the notice will tell you what to
do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might
see CAUTION and NOTICE warningsin
different colors or in different words.
In
this manual, we’ve used the familiar
words that Pontiac has usedfor years.
You’ll also see warning labels on your
vehicle. They use yellow for cautions,
blue for notices, and the words
CAUTION or NOTICE.
...4
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
FASTEN
CAUSTIC
4
These symbols
have to do with
your lights:
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
TURN
SIGNALS
e
SEAT
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
RADIATOR
COOLANT
BELTS
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
BURNS
HIGH
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
=o
=
OR
BEAM
,\I/,
FOG LAMPS
$0
c
rl
r;-
VENTILATING
FAN
-F-
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
FUSE -%-
I-1
RADIO
VOLUME
a
k
,
I
43
CONDITIONING
AIR
FUEL
@
TRUNK
RELEASE
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
9%
LIGHTER
a
m
TEMP
OIL
ANTIBRAKE
U)CK
(i)
SPEAKER
b
5...
Notes
/
...6
Part I
Seats & Restraint Systems
.
H e r e you’ll find information about the
seats in p u r Pontiac and how to use
your safety beltsproperly. You can
also tearn about some things you
should not do with safety belts
.
Seats and Seat Controls ...............................................
8
Removing and Replacing Rear Seats ...............................
: .... 11
SafetyBelts .......................................................
17
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .....................................
21
DriverPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System ................................
25
30
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .....................................
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : ... 30
RearSeatPassengers ................................................
30
Children ..........................................................
35
Smaller Children and Babies ..........................................
36
Built-In ChildRestraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Child Restraints ....................................................
43
LargerChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Safety Belt Extender ................................................
51
Replacing Seat and Restraint System Parts After a Crash .................... 51
.
7 ...
Seats & Restraint Systems
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the
seats-how to adjust them, take them out,
put them back in, and fold them up and
down.
Manual Front Seats
Four- Way Manual Seat
%dl up the lever on the front of theseat to
~nlockit. Slide the seat to where you
vant it. Then release the lever and try to
nove the seat with your body, to make
are the seat is locked into place.
The driver’s seat can be adjusted four
ways.
Use the lever on the front of the seat to
adjust the seat forward or back(see
“Manual Front Seats” earlier in this
section).
To raise the driver’s seat, pull up the lever
on the side of the seat. To lower the seat,
push the lever down.
-..8
Six- Way PowerSeat
Reclining Front Seatbacks
(OPTION)
To adjust the seatback, rotate this knob.
To adjust the driver’s six-way power seat: Do not have a seatback reclined if your
Front Control (A): Raise the front of the vehicle is moving.
seat by holding the switch up. Hold the
switch down to lower the front of the seat.
Center Control (B): Move the seat
forward or back by holding the control to
the front or back. Raise or lower the seat
by holding the control up or down.
Rear Control (C): Raise the rear of the
seat by holding the switch up. Hold the
switch down to lower the rear of the seat.
9...
Seats & Restraint Systems
Reclining Front Seatbacks
Head Restraints
(CONK)
Slide the head restraint up or downso that
the top of the restraint is closestto the top
of your ears.
This position reduces the chanceof a
neck injury in a crash.
On some models, the head restraintstilt
forward and rearward also.
Bench Seat
If you have a rear bench seat, the seatback
can be folded down. Also, the bench seat
can be removed or moved to a different
floor location to provide extra storage
space.
0
.IO
Folding the Seatback
Removing the Bench Seat Replacing the Bench Seat
To fold down the seatback, lift the
seatback latch release while foldingthe
seatback forward.
1. Make sure the seatback is in the
upright position, and that all safety
belts are on the seat.
To raise the seatback, lift the seatback
2. Then lift the seatback latch release
latch release while raising the seatback
while folding the seatback forward.
until it locks upright. Push and pullon the
3. From behind the bench seat, pull up
seatback to check that it is locked.
the two rear levers, and lift the bench
seat.
Don’t put the bench seat inso it faces
backward, because it won’t latch that way.
If you want more storage room behind the
seat, use the floor pins closer to the front
of the vehicle. See “Adjusting Rear Seats”
later in this section.
1. Place the front hooks of the bench seat
latch onto the front floor pins.
4. Remove the bench seat from the
vehicle.
II
...
Seats & Restraint Systems
Replacing the Bench Seat
(CONT.)’
4. Lift the seatback latch release and
raise the seatback until it locks
upright.
2. Push the rear hooks into’the rear floor
5. Push and pull on the seatback to check
pins, then push down onuhe two levers
that it is locked.
to lock the rear of the bench in place.
3. Try to raise the bench seat to check
that it is locked down.
Semovable Rear Bucket
Seats (OPTION)
?here are three typesof rear seats:
‘RIGHT ONLY”, “CENTER or LEFT”,
.nd “LEFT ONLY”. “RIGHT ONLY” and
‘LEFT ONLY” seats may be equipped
vith the built-in child restraint option.
The rear bucket seats can be removed to
Irovide extra storage. Each seatthat has
he built-in child restraint option fitsin
mly one location in your vehicle, but
‘eats thatdon’t have the built-in child
estraint can be moved to different floor
ocations. The back of each seat has a
liagram (similar to the one above) that
;bows where the seat must be located in
/our vehicle.
0
.
.
I2
“RIGHT ONLY” seats that don’t have the
built-in child restraint fit only in the right
locations. “LEFT ONLY” seats thatdon’t
have the built-in child restraint fitonly in
the left locations. The “CENTER OR
LEFT” seat fits in the center location and
in either left location.
“RIGHT ONLY” seats that havethe
built-in child restraint option fit onIy in
the rear set of floor pins in the right
location of the second row. “LEFT
ONLY” seats that have the built-in child
restraint optionfit only in the rearset of
of the
floor pins in the left location
second row.
Entry to Third Row Bucket
Seats
The “RIGHT ONLY” seats have a lower
To install third row seats, the second row lever to tilt the seat forward. To get into
seats must be tilted forward or removed. third row seats, push the lever on the
Don’t put the seats in the wrong locations. “RIGHT ONLY” seat nearest the sliding
door and tilt the seat forward. Then pull
the seat back and check that it locks into
place.
To get out of the third row seats, push
down on the rear release bar under the
seat ahead of you to tilt the seat forward.
Seats & Restraint Systems
Removing Rear Bucket
Seats
Removing the RIGHTONLY Seats:
1. Lift the upper lever to fold the
seatback forward.
2. Push the lower lever back so the entire
seat and seatback tilt forward.
3. Then, from behind the seat, support
the top portion of the seat with one
hand as you squeeze the front release
bar toward the crossbar. The seat will
release from the floor pins.
temoving LEFT ONLY and CENTER
IR LEFT Seats:
I. Lift the upper lever to fold the
seatback forward.
I 2.
Push down on the rear release bar. The 3. Then, from behind the seat, support
entire seat will tilt forward.
the top portion of the seat with one
hand as you squeeze the front release
bar toward the crossbar. The seat will
release from the floor pins.
Adjusting Rear Seats
Each rear seat location has two sets of
floor pins. Seats equipped with the
built-in child restraint option must be
secured in the rear set of floor pins. Seats
that don’t have the built-in child restraint
can be secured in either set of floor pins.
Move the position of these seats up or
back to provide a little more room behind
or in front of a seat.
IS...
Seats & Restraint Systems
I
Replacing Rear Bucket
Seats
1. With the entire seat tilted forward,
place the front hooks of the seat latch
onto the front floor pins.
Follow the diagram on the back of the
seats to replace the seats in their proper
location.
2. Firmly press the rear hooks onto the
rear floor pins. The seat should lock
into position.
The “LEFT ONLY” seats fit only in the
left positions. The “RIGHT ONLY” seats
fit only in the right positions. The
“CENTER OR LEFT” seat fits in the
center position and in either left position.
3. Lift the upper lever and pull up on the
To install third row seats, if your vehicle
is equipped with them, the second row
seats must be tilted forward or removed.
5. Check to see that you have put the
seats into the proper location,
according to the label on each seat. If
not, the seats may not latch properly,
and your passengers may not have the
proper safety belt.
Don’t try to place the seats in backward,
because they won’t latch that way.
. . 16
seatback until it locks upright.
4. Push and pull on the seat to check that
it is locked.
Dump And Stow Feature
Second and third row seats have been
modified to allow them to foldfully
upward and forward when the seatsare
anchored in the rear-most position.This
modification improves both
luggage/cargo capacity and rear seat
entry/exit.
Safety Belts: They’re
For Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to
use safety belts properly. It also tells you
some things you should not do with safety
belts.
And it explains the Supplemental
Inflatable Restraint, or “air bag” system.
This figure lights up as a reminder to
buckle up. (See “Safety Belt Reminder
Light” in the Index.)
In many states and Canadian provinces,
the law says to wear safety belts. Hexe’s
why: Thev work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If
you do have a crash, you don’t know if it
will be a bad one.
17...
Seats & Restraint Systems
Safety Belts: They’re
For Everyone (CONI)
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes
can be so serious that even buckled up a
person wouldn’t survive. But most
crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without belts they
could have been badly hurt or killed.
Why Safety Belts Work
2. When the bike hits the block, it stops.
But the child keeps going!
When you ride in or on anything, you go
as fast as it goes.
1. For example, if the bike is going
10 mph (16 km/h), so is the child.
After more than 25 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most
crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot!
3. Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s
just a seat on wheels.
... 18
4. Put someone on it.
6. The person keeps going until stopped
by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield ...
5. Get it up to speed. Then stop the
8. or the safety belts!
"Y.
I
With safety belts, you slow down as
the vehicle does. You get more time to
stop. You stop over more distanqe, and
your strongest bones take the forFes.
That's why safety belts make such
good sense.
7. or the instrument panel ...
vehicle. The rider doesn't stop.
19.
Seats & Restraint Systems
I‘
Q: Why don’t they just put in air bags
so people won’t have to wear safety
Here Are Questions
Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -and the Answers
A: Air bags, or Supplemental Inflatable
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle
after an accidentif I’m wearing a
safety belt?
,! :r ‘,.?.2
. *:y.:&
;
,$;@&
belts?
,
.;<
A: You could bme --.whet er you re-
wearing a safety belt or not. But you
can easily unbuckle a safety belt, even
if you’re upside down. And your
chance of being conscious during and
after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are
belted.
Restraint systems, are in some
vehicles today and will be in more of
them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only -- so they
work with safety belts, not instead of
them. Every air bag system ever
offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a
vehicle that has air bags, you still have
to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in
frontal collisions, but especially in
side and other collisions.
c2: If I’m a good driver, andI never
drive far from home, whyshould I
wear safety belts?
4: You may be an excellent driver, but if
you’re in an accident -- even one that
isn’t your fault-- you and your
passengers can behurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things
beyond your control, such asbad
drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles
:40 km) of home. And the greatest number
D f serious injuries anddeathsoccurat
speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
1 1 How To Wear Safety
Belts Properly
f
Adults
This section is only for people of adult
size.
Safety Beli Reminder
Light
When the key is turned to “Run” or
“Start,” a chime will come on for about
eight seconds to remind peopleto fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s
safety belt is already buckled. Thesafety
belt light will also come on and stay on
until the driver’s belt is buckled.
Be aware that there are special things to
know about safety belts and children. And
there are different rules for smaller
children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your Pontiac, see “Children,”
1 Driver Position
located later in this section. Follow those
This section describes the driver’s
rules for everyone’s protection.
restraint system.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
21
...
Seats & Restraint Systems
I
Lapshoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s
how to wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see
“Seats” in the Index) so you can sit
up straight.
belt across you. Don’t let it get
twisted.
If the belt stops beforeit reaches the
buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep
pulling until you can buckle the belt.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle
until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to makesure
it is secure.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the
If the belt isn’t long enough,see
“Safety Belt Extender” at the endof
this section.
Make sure the release buttonon the
buckle is positioned so you would be
able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
...22
c
r
I,
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down
on the buckle end of the belt as you
pull up on the shoulder belt.
7’he lap part of the belt should be worn
1(IW and snug on the hips, just touching
tlle thighs. In a crash, this applies force to
tlle strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
le:ss likely to slide under the lap belt. If
Y ou slid under it, the belt would apply
fcxce at your abdomen. This could cause
stxious or even fatal injuries. The
SInoulder belt should go over the shoulder
a1nd across the chest. These parts of the
blody are best able totake belt restraining
fcxces.
2: What’s wrong with this?
\: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t
give nearly as much protection this
way.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden
st:op or a crash.
23.
.
Seats & Restraint Systems
Lap-Shoulder Belt(CONT.)
Q: What’s wrong with this?
3: What’s wrong withthis?
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A: The belt is over an armrest.
k The shoulder beltis worn under the
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
place.
...24
arm. It should be worn over the
shoulder at all times.
Supplemental
Inflatable Restraint
System (Air Bag)
This section explains the driver’s
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR)
system, commonly referred to as an air
bag. Here are the most important things to
know:
I’
Q: What’s wrong withthis?
I
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
3efore you close the door, be sure the belt
3 out of the way. If you slam the door on
t, you can damage both the belt and your
,chicle.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button
on the buckle. The belt should go back
out of the way.
25...
Seats & Restraint Systems
Supplemental
Inflatable Restraint
System (AirBag) (CONT.)
AIR BAG
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the
instrument panel, which shows“AIR
BAG’ on it. The system checks for
electrical malfunctions, and the light tells
you if there is a problem.
...26
You will see this light flashfor a few
seconds when you turn your ignitionto
“Run” or “Start.” Then the light shouldgo
out, which meansthe system is ready.
Remember, if the air bag readinesslight
doesn’t come on when you start your
vehicle, or stays on, orcomes on when
you are driving, your air bag system may
not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
H0.w The Air Bag System
Works
Where is the air bag?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
Seats & Restraint Systems
How The Air Bag System
Works (CONT.)
What makes an air bag inflate?
In a frontal impact of sufficient severity,the
air bag sensing system detects that the
vehicle is suddenly stopping as a result of a
crash. The sensing system triggers a
chemical reaction of the sodium azide
sealed in the inflator. The reaction produces
nitrogen gas, which inflates the cloth bag.
The inflator, cloth bag, and related
hardware are all part ofthe air bag inflator
module packed inside the steering wheel.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering wrhee:l.
The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags
distribute the force of the impact more
evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually.
But air bags would not provide protection
in many types of collisions, including
rollovers and rear and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is
not toward the air bag. Air bags should
never be regarded as anything more than
a supplement to safety belt protection in
moderate to severe frontal and
near-frontal collisions.
0
The air bagis designed to inflate only
once. After it inflates, you’ll need
some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, theair
bag system won’t be there to help
protect you in another crash. A new
system will include the air bag module
and possibly other parts. The service
manual has information about the
need to replace other parts.
0
Your vehicle is equipped with a
diagnostic module, which records
information about the airbag system
if the air bag deploys duringa crash.
The module records information about
the readiness of the system, which
sensors activated the deployment, and
whether the driver’s safety belt wasin
use.
0
Let only qualified technicians work on
your air bag system. Improper service
can mean that your air bag system
won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
What will you see afteran air bag
inflation?
After the air bag has inflated, it will then
quickly deflate. This occurs so quickly
that some people may not even realize
that the air bag inflated. Some
components of the air bag module in the
steering wheel hub may be hot for a short
time, but the portion of the bag that comes
into contact with you will not be hot to
the touch. There will be small amounts of
smoke and dust coming from vents in the
deflated air bag. The air bag will not
impede the driver’s vision or ability to
steer the vehicle, nor will it hinder the
occupants from exiting the vehicle.
1 I NOTICE:
If you damage the cover for the
driver’s air bag, it may not work
properly. You may have to replace
the air bag on the steering wheel.
Do not open or break the air bag
II
cover.
Is the smoke from an air bag inflation
harmful?
The particles emitted duringair bag
inflation are not harmfulto most people.
Some people with respiratory ailments
may experience difficulty breathing if
they stay in the vehicle with the windows
closed after air bag inflation. So, if your
air bag inflates, you and any passengers
should exit the vehicle if and when it is
safe to do so. If you or your passengers
can’t get out of the vehicle, try to get
fresh air by opening a window, turningor
the fan, or opening a door.
I
Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Pontiac
The air bag affects how your Pontiac
should be serviced. There are parts of the
air bag system in several places around
your vehicle. You don’t want the system
to inflate while someone is working on
your vehicle. Your Pontiac dealer and the
1994 Pontiac Service Manual have
information about servicing your vehicle
and the air bag system. The air bag
system does not need regular
maintenance.
r
Seats & Restraint Systems
I Rear
Seat Passengers
X’s very important for rear seat
Jassengers to buckle up! Accident
itatistics show that unbelted people in the
-ear seatare hurt more often in crashes
:han those whoare wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted
:an be thrown outof the vehicle in a
:rash. And they can strike others in the
vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including
pregnant women. Like all occupants, they
are more likely to be seriously injured if
they don’t wear safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lapshoulder belt, and the lap portion should
be worn as low as possible throughout the
pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to
protect the mother. When a safety belt is
worn properly, it’s more likely that the
fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key
to making safety belts effective is wearing
them properly.
30
Right Front Passenger
Position
The right front passenger’s safety belt
works the same way as the driver’s safetl
belt. See “Driver Position,” earlier in
this part.
C
Rear Seat Outside
Passenger Positions
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the
belt across you. Don’t let it get
twisted.
If the belt stops before it reaches the
buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep
pulling until you can buckle it.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle
until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it
is secure.
The positions next to the windows have
lap-shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear
one properly.
If the belt is not longenough, see “Safety
Belt Extender’’ at the endof this section.
Make sure the release button on the
buckle is positioned so you would be able
to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you
Zver had to.
31
...
Seats & Restraint Systems
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden
;top ora crash.
Rear Seat Outside
Passenger Positions
(CONI)
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down
on the buckle end of the belt as you
pull up on the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching
the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to
the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If
you slid under it, the belt would apply
force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
a
To unlatch the belt, just push the
button on the buckle.
Center Passenger
Position (Bench Seat)
If your vehicle has a rear bench seat,
someone can sit in the center position.
Lap Belt
When you sit in the center position of the
bench seat, you have a lap safety belt,
which has no retractor.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate
and pull it along the belt.
Seats & Restraint Systems
Lap Belt (CONK)
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end
as shown until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same
way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety
Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the
buckle is positioned so you would be able
to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you
ever had to.
00.34
Center Passenger
Position (Bucket Seat)
1. Pick up the latch plateand, in a single
motion, pull the beltacross you. Don’t
let it get twisted.
f your vehicle has bucket seats, someone
:an sit in the center bucket seat.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle
until it clicks. If the belt stops before it
reaches the buckle, letit go back all
the way and startagain. Pull up on the
latch plate to make sure it is secure.
1
lap Belt
Nhen you sit in the center position buck€
eat, you have a lap safety belt which has
1 retractor.
3. Feed the lap belt into the retractor to
tighten it.
4. Position and release it the same way
as the lap partof a lap-shoulder belt.
If the belt isn’tlong enough, see
“Safety Belt Extender” at the end of
this section. Makesure the release
button on the buckle is positionedso
you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
The center position bucket seat is a
“Center or Left” type seat.Because it is
the only bucket seat with a lap belt, and
has a buckle on only one side, there are
certain places a “Center or Left”type
bucket seat should, and should not, be
used. See “Seats” in the Index. If the
“Center or Left” bucketseat is used on
the left side of the vehicle,the person
sitting there should use the lap-shoulder
belt. It works the same way as the driver’s
safety belt. See “Driver Position”in the
Index.
Children
Everyone in a vehicleneeds protechon!
That includes infants and all childta
smaller than adult size. In fact, the,;hawin
every state in the United States and,in
every Canadian province says chilqken up
to some agemust be restrained whifein a
vehicle.
35.0.
Seats & Restraint Systems
Smaller Children and
Babies
...36
D. Shoulder Harness Clip
E. Removable Pad
F. Seat Belt Latch Plates
G. Buckle
H. Seat Belt Buckle Release Button
(Red)
I. Shoulder Harness Release Strap
(Black)
Built-Zn Child Restrain,
J. Shoulder Harness Adjustment Strap
(Grey1
(OPTION)
K. Child Restraint Cushion
If you have a rear seat with the optional
built-in child restraint, refer to thispictun
to become familiar with the partsof each
child seat and 5-point harness listed
below:
A. Child Head Restraint
B. Head Restraint Release Strap
C. Shoulder Harness Straps
This child restraint system conforms to all
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
This child restraint is designed for use
only by children who weigh between 20
and 40 pounds (9 and 18 kg) and whose
height is 40 inches ( 102 cm) or less and
who are capable of sitting upright alone.
In addition, the child must be one year old
or more and at least 28 inches (71 cm) in
height. It is important to use an approved,
rear-facing infant restraint for a full year
to allow the neck and spine to develop
enough to support the weight of the
child’s head in the event of a collision.
Seats & Restraint Systems
WARNING! FAILURE TO FOLLOW
THE MANUFACTURER’S
[NSTRUCTIONS ON THE USEOF
I’HIS CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
CAN RESULT IN YOUR CHILD
STRIKING THE VEHICLE’S
[NTERIOR DURING A SUDDEN STOP
OR CRASH. SNUGLY ADJUST THE
BELTS PROVIDED WITH THIS CHILD
RESTRAINT AROUND YOUR CHILD.
I Built-In
Child Restraini
(COPIT.)
:o make sure that the child is tall enough!
ompare thechild’s standing height to the
op surface of the bucket seat, which is
.bout 29 inches (74 cm) from thefloor.
..- 3 8
The booster seat canbe used by children
wer 40 pounds (18 kg) or whose
.boulders are above theshoulder belt
mchorages of the 5-point child restraint
larness. The vehiclelap-shoulder belt is
lsed instead of the 5-point harness
,ystem. If a child’s shoulders are higher
han the shoulder belt anchorages while
lsing the 5-point harness, the spine could
)e injured in a collision.
Just like the other restraint system inyou
vehicle, your built-in child restraint needs
to be periodically checked and may need
to have parts replaced after a crash. See
”Checking Your Restraint Systems’’ and
“Replacing Seat and Restraint System
Parts After aCrash” in the Index.
II
I'
I
To Use the Built-in Child
Restraint
1. Pull the child head restraint release
strap and raise the head restraintuntil
you hear the latch click.
I
!. Lower the child restraint cushion.
3. Before placing.the child in the child
restraint, add slack to the shoulder
hamess. Pull the black shoulder
harness release strap firmly. At the
same time pull both shoulder harness
straps through the slots in the sedback
as shown.
..*+
- ,'
'.)s#
$'...i.
.
-. 1
39.m.
Seats & Restraint Systems
To Use the Built-in Child
7estraint (CONT.)
E.
Separate the halves of the shoulder
harness clip.
i. Place the child in the child restraint
and put a shoulder harness strap over
each shoulder. Insert both seat belt
latch plates into the buckle and pull ul
on them to make sure they are firmly
latched.
Be sure that the seat buckle is free of
foreign objects that may prevent you
from properly latching the latch plates
If an object is in the opening, see your
Pontiac dealer for service before using
the child restraint.
...40
6 Fasten the two halves of the shoulder
harness clip together and put it two
to
three inches (5-8 cm) below the
child’s chin.The purpose of the clip is
to keep the shoulder harness straps
positioned correctly on the shoulders.
If you expect the child will sleep while
riding, a U-shaped pillow that supports
the child’s chin may be helpful in
providing additional comfort. Such
devices may be found in the child
restraint section of major toy stores or
other stores where children’s accessories
are sold.
Pull the shoulder harness adjustment
strap (grey) firmly until the shoulder
harness straps are snug againstthe
child’s shoulders.
1. To release the child from theharness,
separate the halvesof the shoulder
harness clip. Then push the red releast
button in the buckle. Move the
shoulder harness straps to the side an(
remove the child.
iTo Store the Built-lnChild
tqestraint
Make sure that the crotch strap is held
flush to the child restraint cushion
with the fastener strip. Also be sure
the shoulder harness adjustment strap
(grey) is folded up in the seat. This
will allow the cushion to fold
completely into the seatback. Raise
the cushion.
41
...
Seats & Restraint Systems
To Store the Built-ln Child To Use as a Booster Seat
Sestraint (CQNT.);,
1. Pull the head restraint release strap
!. Unlatch the child head restraint by
pulling the release.strap. Lower the
head restraint and press it firmly into
the seatback until you hear the latch
click.
.7
...42
and raise the head restraint until you
hear the latch click.
!. Lower the child restraint cushion.
Child Restraints
Be sure to follow the instructions for the
restraint. You may find these instructions
on the restraint itself or ina booklet, or
both. These restraints use the belt system
in your vehicle, but the child also has to
be secured within the restraint to help
reduce the chance of personal injury. The
instructions that come with the infant or
child restraint will show you howto do
that.
3. Store the 5-point child restraint
harness behind the removable pad.
The pad is held in place by fastener
strips.
.5
Place the child on the cushion and
fasten the vehicle lap-shoulder belt
around the child.
. To release the child from the vehicle
lap-shoulder belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
43...
Seats & Restraint Systems
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are
safer if they are restrained in the rear
rather than the front seat. We at General
Motors therefore recommend that you put
your child restraint in the rear seat unless
the child is an infant and you’re the only
adult in the vehicle. In that case, you
might want to secure the restraint in the
front seat where you cankeep an eye on
the baby.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure’
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child
restraint can move around in a collision or
sudden stop and injure people in the
vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in your vehicle -- even
when no child is in it.
Top Strap
If your child restraint has a top strap, I t
should be anchored.
If your vehicle has third row seats, anchor
brackets for the second row outside
positions are located just above the place
where the thirdrow lap-shoulder belts
meet the floor. There’sa vinyl sleeve
there; to get to the bracket, push thisvinyl
sleeve aside slightly. Anchor the top strap
to the bracket.
If your vehicle does not have third row
seats and belts, orif you need to have an
anchor bracket installed for any additional
passenger seat position, you canask your
Pontiac dealer to put it in for you. If you
want to install an anchor bracket yourself,
your dealer can tellyou how to do it.
Once you have the top strap anchored,
you’ll be ready to secure the child
restraint itself.
ma.44
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap
n
and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s
safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how. Tilt
the latch plate to adjust the belt if
needed.
c
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the
child’s face or neck, put it behind the
child restraint.
Securing a Chi-ldRestrain4
n an Outside Position
bu’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See
le earlier section about the top
strap if
le child restraint has one.
. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow
the instructions forthe child restraint.
. Secure the child in the child restraint
as the instructions say.
4. B,ucklethe belt. Make sure the xelease
button is positioned so you woild be
able to unbuckle the safety beli:’.
quickly if you ever had to.
’
Seats & Restraint Systems
Securing a Child Restraint6.
in an Outside Position
(CON7J
5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the
shoulder belt while you push down on
the child restraint.
...46
Push and pull the child restraint in
different directions to be sure it is
secure.
Securing a Child Restraint
in the Center Seat Position
(Bench Seat)
To remove the child restraint, just
unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let When you secure a child restraint in a
it go back all the way. The safety belt will center seating position, you’ll be using the
lap belt.
move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult or larger child passenger.
If the child restraint hasa top strap, see
“Top Strap” earlier in this section.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in
different directions tobe sure it is
secure. If the child restraint isn’t
secure, turn the latch plate overand
buckle it again. Then see if it is
secure. If it isn’t, secure therestraint
in a different place in the vehicle and
contact the child restraint makdr for
their advice about how to attach the
child restraint properly.
1. Make the belt as long as possible by
tilting the latchplate and pulling it
along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow
the instructions for thechi1.drestraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint
as the instructions say.
r
To remove the child restraint, just
5. Buckle the belt. ‘Makesure the release unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will
be ready towork for an adult or l&ger
button is positioned so you would be
child passenger.
able tounbuckle the safetybelt
quickly if you ever had to.
6. To tighten the belt, pull its free end
while you push down on the child
restraint.
4. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you
how.
470.0
Seats & Restraint Systems
Securing a Child Restraint 3.
in the Center Seat Positior:
4.
(Bucket Seat)
You’ll be using the lap belt. See the
earlier section about the top strap if the
child restraint has one.
1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow
the instructions for the child restraint.
2. Secure the child in the child restraint
as the instructions say.
...48
Pull the lap belt all the way out
without stopping.
While holding it out, run the belt
through or around the child restraint.
The child restraint instructions will
show you how.
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release
button is positioned so you would be
able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
6. To tighten the belt, feed it back into
the retractor whileyou push down on
the child restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in
different directions to be sure it is
secure.
To remove the child restraint, just
unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let
it go back all the way. The safety belt will
move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult or larger child passenger.
Larger Children
3hildren who have outgrown child
*estraintsshould wear the vehicle’s safety
>elk
f you have the choice, a child shouldsit
lext to a window so the child can wear a
ap-shoulder belt and get the additional
.estraint a shoulder belt can provide.
4ccident statistics show that children are
iafer if they are restrained in the rear seat.
3ut they need to use the safety belts
xoperly.
D
Children who aren’t buckled up can
be thrown out in a crash.
Seats & Restraint Systems
Q:What if a child is wearinga
lap-shoulder belt, but the child isso
small that the shoulder beltis very
close to the child’s face or neck?
A: Move the child toward the centerof
Larger Children(CONT.)
0
Children who aren’t buckled up can
strike other people who are.
...50
the vehicle, but be sure that the
shoulder belt stillis on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s
upper body would have the restraint
that belts provide..If the child is so
small that the shoulder belt is still very
close to the child’s faceor neck, you
might want to place the child in a sea-t
that has a lap belt,if your vehicle has
one.
Seats & Restraint Systems
[f your vehicle has the built-in child
Yestraint, torn or frayed harness straps can
rip apart under impact forces just like torn
3r frayed safety belts can. They may not
protect a child in a crash. If a harness
strap is torn or frayed, get a new harness
right away.
Replacing Seat and
Restraint System Parts
After a Crash (CONT.)
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A: The belt is torn.
Torn or frayed belts may not protect you
in a crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is tom or frayed,
get a new one right away.
... 52
Before replacing any safety belt, see your
dealer for the correct part number. You’ll
need the model year and model number
for your vehicle. The model year is on
your title and registration. And you can
find the model number on the
Certification/Tire label of your vehicle.
See “Certification/Tire Label” in the
Index.
The model number on the replacement
belt must be listed on the safety belt you
want to replace.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out to
see the label.
H e r e you can learn about the many
standard and optional features on
Part
your Pontiac. and information on
starting. shiftingand braking. Atso
explained are the instrument panel
and the warning systems that tell you
if everything is working properly ..
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
and what todo if you have a problem. Front Doors .......................................................
55
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
Remote Keyless Entry ............................................
. . 58
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
Engine Coolant Heater (Engine Block Heater) .........................
. . 72
Shifting the Transaxle .................................................
73
ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
. . 78
Shifting into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"'''''.I
. . 81
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 . . 81
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a1
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator .................................
83
CruiseControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
87
Headlights ........................................................
90
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
Windshield Washer .................................................
Rear Window Wiper and Washer .......................................
92
92
Interior Lights .....................................................
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
Glove Box and Storage Compartments ..................................
98
Luggagecarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
102
105
Instrumentpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators ..................................
110
53
2
Features & Controls
c
...
Features & Controls
[hen a new Trans Sport is delivered,the
Zaler removes the plugs from the keys,
Id gives them to the first owner.
ach plug has a code on it that tells your
zaler or a qualified locksmithhow to
lake extra keys. Keep the plugs ina safe
lace. If you lose your keys, you’llbe
Ae to have new ones made easily using
lese plugs.
w Keys
The ignition keys are for the ignition only.
Your Pontiac has a number ofnew
features that can help prevent theft.
But you can have a lot of trouble
getting into your vehicleif you ever
lock your keys inside. You may
even have to damage your vehicle to
get in. So be sure you have extra
keys.
The door keys are for the doors and all
other locks.
..e54
NOTICE:
Door Locks
Front Doors
There are several ways to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
From the Outside:
'?<
Use your door key or remote keyl&
entry transmitter, if your vehicle his this
option.
I .
Features & Controls
;witch or the remote transmitter. This
’eature is designed to help keep you from
ocking your keysin your vehicle.
[f the sliding door is open when you press
:he power door lock switch, it will lock
mtomatically within five seconds after
you close it.
w Door Locks
(CONT.)
w Power Door Locks
[f you have the optional Remote Keyless
Entry System, this featurewill be
replaced by a different lock delay system.
See “Remote Keyless Entry” later in this
section.
With power locks, when the doors are
locked, the inside as well as the outside
From the outside of either front door, the door latch release cannot open the doors.
To lock the door, slide the locking lever
door key unlocks all doors and the
rearward.
This safety feature preventsa door from
liftgate. From the inside, press the front of being accidentally opened from the inside
To unlock the door, slide the locking lever the power door lock switch on either front
by moving the handle.
forward.
door.
To override this safety feature, slide the
You can lock all doors and the liftgate
locking lever to the unlock position on the
from inside by pressing the rear of the
door you want to open.
power lock switch on either front door.
When the liftgate has been unlocked with
If you have the optional Remote Keyless the power door locks, you won’t need the
Entry System, your vehicle has a special key to open it. Simplyturn the lock
security feature. If the driver’s door is
clockwise until the latch releases. This is
open and your key is in the ignition in the also true if you use the optional remote
off position, you won’t be able to set the keyless entry transmitter. See “Remote
door locks with the power door lock
Keyless Entry’’ later in this section.
From the Inside:
...56
(OPTION)
To lock the liftgate, use the powerdoor
lock switch, the optional remote keyless
entry transmitter, or lock it manually by
turning the lock counterclockwise.
Automatic Door Locks
Overriding Lock Delay
0
To program the automatic door locks
system to unlock only the driver’s
door when the shift lever is returned to
“I?” (Park), press the unlock symbol
on your remote transmitter once. The
driver’s door will unlock, indicating
that this mode has been successfully
programmed.
0
To program the automatic door locks
system to unlock all doors when the
shift lever is returned to “P” (Park),
press the unlock symbol on your
remote transmitter once (the driver’s
door will unlock), then press the
unlock symbol again. All doors will
unlock, indicating that this mode has
been successfully programmed.
To override the lock delay feature, press
the front of the power door locks switch
(the unlock position) while the shift lever
is in “P” (Park).
If you have the Remote Keyless Entry
System, there are three additional ways
With this feature you can unlock allof the you can disable the lock delay feature:
doors from the outsideby holding the key
Press the unlock symbol on your
in the unlock position for one second. To
remote transmitter,
unlock only the driver’s or passenger’s
door, turn the keyto the unlock position
0 Return the shift lever to “P” (Park), or
and release.
0 Turntheignitionoff.
From the inside, when the ignition is on
Customizing Your Automatic Door
and the driver’s dooris closed, all doors
Locks Feature
will lock each time you move the shift
lever out of “P” (Park), or manually lock
1he.doors using the power lock switches With the Remote Keyless Entry System
you can customize your automatic door
they will lock when closed.
locks feature to suit your individual
If the sliding dooris open when you move needs. (See “Remote Keyless Entry” later
.in this section.)
the shift lever out of“P” (Park), a lock
delay feature allows the sliding door to
With the doors closed and the ignition on,
lock five seconds after it is closed.
press and hold the driver’s power door
lock switch in the lock position for ten
With the automatic door locks feature,
seconds.
The doors will lock, then unlock,
you can still lock or unlock the doors at
indicating that you have ten seconds in
any time, either manually orwith the
which
to program one of four custom
power door lock switches.
modes.
(OPTION)
To program the automatic door locks
system to leave all doors locked when
the shift lever is returned to “P”
(Park), press the lock symbol on your
remote transmitter once. All doors will
lock, indicating that this mode has
been successfully programmed.
s/...
Features & Controls
Automatic Door Locks
nterference received, including
nterference that may cause undesired
)peration.
(CONT.)
0
To disengage the automatic door locks
system, press the lock symbol on your
remote transmitter once (all doors will
lock). Then press the lock symbol
again. All doors will lock again,
indicating that this mode has been
successfully programmed.
should interference to this system occur,
.ry this:
You can reprogram the automatic door
locks system at any time. If you do not
w Remote Keyless Entry
program the automatic door locks system,
(OPTION)
all doors will remain locked when the
shift lever is returned to “P” (Park).
If your Pontiac has this option, you can
lock
and unlock your doors and liftgate
If you have more than one remote
from up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the
transmitter for your vehicle, your
key
chain transmitter supplied with your
automatic door locks system will operate
vehicle.
as programmed with any of them. There
is no need to program each one
Your Remote Keyless Entry System
individually.
operates on a radio frequency subject to
w Leaving Your Vehicle
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) Rules.
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your
keys, open your door and set the locks
from inside. Then get out and close the
door.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This devicl
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any
...58
D
Be sure to use the transmitterwith the
ignition switch “OFF’ to eliminate
interference from other electronic
systems in the vehicle.
D
Check to determineif battery
replacement is necessary. See the
instructions on battery replacement.
Check the distance.You may be too
far from your vehicle. This product
has a maximum range.
0
Check the location. Other vehicles or
objects may be blocking the signal.
0
See your Pontiac dealer ora qualified
technician for service.
Changes or modifications to this system
by other than an authorized service
facility could void authorization to use
this equipment.
Operation
with the interior lights on, press
a
The driver’s door will unlock andthe
interior lights will go on when
is
pressed (see “Illuminated Entry System”
later in this section). If pressed again
within five seconds, all doors and the
liftgate will unlock. All doors and the
liftgate will lock when
6
is pressed.
If the driver’s door is open and your
key
is in the ignition in theO
f position, you
won’t be able to set the door locks with
the power door lock switch or theremote
transmitter. This security feature is
designed to help keepyou from locking
your keys in your vehicle.
Lock Delay
This lock delay feature canbe operated
using either the remote key chain
transmitter or the power door lock
switch
(see “Power Door Locks” earlierin this
section).
For the lock delay featureto work, the
ignition and the interior lights controlto
the left of the instrument panel cluster
must be off. If you wish to lock thedoors
6
or the
rear of either power door lock switch
twice.
If any door is open when you press
6
or
the rear ofeither power door lock switch,
a chime will sound three times. This
indicates that all doors and the liftgate
will lock about five seconds after the last
door has been closed.
To override the lock delay feature, press
the lock symbol orthe rear of either
power door lock switch again, and the
Joors and liftgate will lock immediately.
[f the sliding door is open, it will lock
mtomatically within five seconds after it
.s closed, and the doors and liftgate will
-ock again.
To cancel the lock delay feature, press the
unlock symbol or the front of either
power door lock switch.
:emote Operation of Power Sliding
boor
’ you have the optional power sliding
oor (see “Power Sliding Door” later in
lis section), your remote transmitter will
ave a third
button
labeled
Press
. to open or close the sliding door.’
F the sliding door is locked, first press
3
twice to unlock all doors, then press
a to open the sliding door.
‘ou can operate the power sliding door
rith the remote transmitter only when the
ower sliding door enable switch on the
verhead console is in the “ON” position.
59..
.
Features & Controls
Ib Replace Batteriesin the Kemote
Keyless Entry:
Matching Transmitterfs)
To Your Vehicle
Each key chain transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from
unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is
lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer.
Remember to bring the remaining
transmitter with you when you go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the
replacement transmitter to your vehicle,
the remaining transmitter must also be
matched‘ Once the new transmitter is
coded, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle.
You can match a transmitter to as many
different vehicles as you own, provided
they are equipped with exactly the same
model system. (General Motors offers
several different models of these systems
on their vehicles.) Each vehicle can have
only four transmitters matched to it.
See your dealer to match transmitters to
another vehicle.
...60
I. Remove the screw from the back
cover.
2. Lift the front cover off, bottom half
first.
3. Remove and replace the two3-volt
batteries (DL 2016).
4. Reassemble the transmitter.
1Battery Replacement
1Jnder normal use, the batteries in your
ELey chain transmitter should last about
t wo years.
fou can tell thebatteries are weak if the
t ransmitter won’t work at the normal
r;ange in any location. If you have to get
C.lose to your vehicle before the
tlransmitter works, it’s probably time to
C:hange the batteries.
7
5. Check the transmitter operation.
If the back of your transmitter hasa slot
instead of a screw, follow these battery
replacement instructions:
To Replace Batteriesin the Remote
Keyless Entry:
1. Insert a coin into the slot in the back
of the transmitter, andturn
counterclockwise to open the cover.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Remove and replace the two 3-volt
batteries (DL 20 16).
4. Reassemble the transmitter.
5. Check the transmitter operation.
Illuminated Entry
System (OPTION)
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in
some cities. Although your Pontiac has a
This option comes with the optional
number of theft deterrent features, we
Remote Keyless Entry System.
know that nothing we put on it can make
When you open the driver’s door, by itself it impossible to steal. However, there are
ways you can help.
or in combination with any passenger
door or the liftgate, the interior lights will
come on and then gradually dim to off 10 Key in the Ignition
seconds after the last door is closed. (If
If you walk away from your vehicle with
the driver’s door has not been opened, the
the keys inside, it’s an easy target for joy
interior lights will immediately dim to
riders or professional thieves -- so don’t
off.)
do it.
a
When you press
on your remote
transmitter, the lights inside your vehicle
will go on, then gradually dim to off after
40 seconds, unless a door or the liftgate is
opened.
When you park your Pontiac and open the
driver’s door, you’ll hear a chime
reminding you to remove your key from
the ignition and take it with you. Always
do this. Your steering wheel will be
locked, and so will your ignition and
When you turn on the ignition, the
transaxle.
And remember to lock the
interior lights will immediately dim to off.
doors.
61
...
Features & Controls
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows
and lock your vehicle. Remember to keep
your valuables out of sight. Put them in a
storage area, or take them with you.
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be
watching your vehicle, it’s best to lock it
up and take your keys. But what if you
have to leave your ignition key? What if
you have to leave something valuable in
your vehicle?
0
Sliding Door
To open the sliding door from outside the
vehicle, pull the front of the latch release
Put your valuables in a storage area,
like your glove box or locking storage out and then toward the rear. If you slide
the door all the way back, it will latch in
bin.
the open position.
Lock the storage bin.
0
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
0
Then take the door key with you.
...62
To move the door forward, you must first
pull the inside or outside latch release out
and then forward or the door will remain
latched in the open position.
c
Sliding Door Lock
Power Sliding Door
From inside the vehicle, lock the sliding
door by moving the manual locking lever
down. Unlock by moving the lever up.
(OPTION)
If you have the optional power door
locks, the sliding door lock has a delay
feature. See “Power Door Locks”in the
Index.
With this option, you can open and close
the sliding door with switches inside your
vehicle. If you have the optional Remote
Keyless Entry System, you can also
operate the sliding door with your remote
transmitter. See “Remote Keyless Entry”
in the Index.
To operate the power sliding door, the
power sliding door enable switch must be
in the “ON” position. This switch is
located overhead on the edge of the front
reading lights console. To disable the
power sliding door feature, slidethe
switch to “OFF”.
To open or close the sliding door, press
and release one of two “PWR DOOR’’
(Power Door) switches. There is one
located overhead between the front
reading lights, and one mounted on the
wall, just in front of the sliding door.
63
...
Features & Controls
Power Sliding Door (CONE)
The sliding door must be unlockedfor the
power sliding door to operate. The key
does not have to be in the ignition. To
help avoid accidental operation of the
sliding door, disable the power sliding
door by placing the power sliding door
enable switch in the “OFF” position.
The power sliding door will only open if
the transaxle is in “P” (Park). The
transaxle does not have to be in “ P ’
(Park) to close the door. If the enable
switch is “ON” and the power sliding
door is open or in the process of closing
when you shift out of “P” (Park), a buzzer
will sound and the “SLIDING DOOR”
light on your instrument panel will flash
(see “Sliding Door Ajar Warning Light”
in the Index). This is a warning that the
sliding door is not completely closed.
-
~~
I f anything obstructs the sliding door
V vhile it is closing, the door will
a utomatically reverse to the open
I:losition, provided it meets sufficient
r esistance. Resistance must be as strong
a.s the force of the closing door,or
S tronger. The force of the closing door
i:ncreases significantly as the door
a,pproaches the latch position.
f
...64
Objects caught in the path of the sliding
door may be damaged. Make sure the
door path is clear before closingthe door.
On vehicles equipped with the optional
power sliding door, a low voltage battery
may cause the system to become
inoperative. This is a built in feature to
prevent damage to the power sliding door
motor.
To manually .openthe power slidingdoor
when the sliding door enable switchis in
the “ON” position, pull the inside or
outside latch release and letgo; the door
will open fully.
When the battery has been charged, follow
these steps:
To manually open the power slidingdoor
when the enable switch isin the “OFF”
position, pull the inside or outside latch
release and slide the door all the way
back.
1. Make sure the door is in the closed
position.
2. Turn the ignition off.
To manually close the power sliding door
when the sliding door enable door switch
is in the “ON” position, pull the inside or
outside latch release or the edge of the
door. Move the door about four inches
toward the closed position and release.
The door will close completely and latch
for you.
To manually close the power sliding door
when the enable switch is in the “OFF”
position, pull the inside or outside latch
release and slide the door all the way
forward to the latch position.
3. Remove the fuse marked “TAIL” from
the fuse panel.
4. Wait 30 seconds.
5. Reinstall the fuse.
6. Cycle the door open and closed with
either the wall mounted or overhead
console switch. Wait three seconds
before opening and closing the door
again.
If this does not restore power sliding door
operation, see your dealer for service.
Features & Controls
Siding Door Child
Security Lock
Your Pontiac may be equipped with a
sliding door child security lock that helps
prevent young children or other
passengers from opening the sliding door
from the inside.
If you have the optional power sliding
door, you can override the security lock
by pressing either “PWR DOOR’ (Power
Door) switch when the power sliding door To Use the Security Lock:
enable switch is in the “ON” position. See
1. Move the security lock lever all the
“Power Sliding Door” earlier in the
way up.
section.
The security lock lever is located on the
inside of the sliding door, near the rear
edge of the door. To access the lever, open
the sliding door. Use the security lock
label on the rear edge of the door as a
guide. Reach your hand around the inside
rear corner of the sliding door to access
the lever.
2. Close the door.
With Optional Power Sliding Door
1. Slide the power sliding door enable
switch on the overhead console to the
“OFF” position.
The sliding door cannot be opened using
the inside handle when the security lock
feature is in use.
’ You Want to Open the Sliding Door
Vhen the Security Lock is On:
. Unlock the sliding door from the
inside.
m
CHILD
ECURITY
0
m
LOCK
0
~
~
2. Then open the door from the outside.
To Cancel the Sliding Door Lock:
With Optional Power Sliding Door
1. Unlock the sliding door from the
inside and open the door.
1. Slide the power sliding door enable
switch to the “ON” position.
2. Press either “PWR DOOR” (Power
Door) switch.
You should let adults and older children
know how the security lock works, and
how to cancel the lock. If you don’t,
adults or older children who ride in the
rear won’t be able to open the sliding
door from the inside when the security
lock feature is in use.
2. Move the security lock lever all the
way down.
The sliding door lock will now work
normally.
Liftgate Lock
To unlock, insert the door key and turn
the lock clockwise. The liftgate will
automatically lock when you close it.
If you have the optional power door locks
or the Remote Keyless Entry System, the
liftgate will lock and unlock differently.
See “Power Door Locks’’ or “Remote
Keyless Entry” in the Index.
Features & Controls
[
Raising the Lij’tgate
Open the liftgate using the handle
recessed above the license plate. Then,
step back and the liftgate will rise by
itself. Lights in the liftgate will come on,
illuminating the rear cargo area (see
“Interior Lights” in the Index).
...68
NOTICE:
Be sure there are no overhead
obstructions, such as a garage door,
before you open the liftgate. You
could slam the liftgate into
something and break the glass.
~~
To close the liftgate, pull down on the
strap, then firmly shut the liftgate. Don’t
drive with the liftgate open, even slight11
See “Exhaust” in the Index. A light on
your instrument panel will warn you if tf
liftgate is not completely closed (see
“Liftgate Ajar Warning Light” in the
Index).
New Vehicle
“Break-In”
Off: Unlocks the steering wheel, ignition,
and transaxle, but does not send electrical
power to any accessories. Use this
position if your vehicle must be pushed or
towed, but never try to push-start your
vehicle. A warning chime will sound if
you open the driver’s door when the
ignition is off and the keyis in the
ignition.
NOTICE:
Your modern Pontiac doesn’t need
an elaborate “break-in.’’But it will
perform better in the long run if you
follow these guidelines:
Don’t drive at any one speed
-- fast or slow -- for the first
500 miles (804 km). Don’t
make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for
the first 200 miles (322 km)
or so. During this time your
new brake linings aren’t yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
“breaking-in” guideline
every time you get new
brake linings.
Ignition Switch
Nith the ignition key in the ignition
witch, you can turn the switch to five
jositions:
Run: An “on” position to which the
switch returns after you start your engine
and release the switch. The switch stays
in the Run position when the engine is
running. But even when the engine is not
running, you can use Run to operate your
electrical power accessories, and to
display some instrument panel warning
lights.
kcessory: An “on” position in which
rou can operate your electrical power
Iccessories. Press in the ignition switch a5 Start: Starts the engine. When the e.ngine
starts, release the key. The ignition switch
rou turn the top of it toward you.
will return to Run for normal driving.
Jock: The only position in which you car
emove the key. This locks your steering
vheel, ignition and transaxle.
69.
..
Features 8t Controls
Ignition Switch (CONK)
Note that even if the engine is not
running, the positions Accessory and Run
are “on” positions that allow you to
operate your electrical accessories, such
as the radio.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in “Lock”
and you can’t turn it, be sure it is all
the way in. If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while
you turn the key hard. But turn the
key only with your hand. Using a
tool to force it could break the key
or the ignition switch. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs
service.
.../u
Starting Your Engine
Engines start differently. The 8th digit of
your Vehicle Identification Number (VIh
shows the code letter or number for your
engine. You will find the VINat the top
left of your instrument panel. (See
“Vehicle Identification Number” in the
Index.) Follow the proper steps to start
the engine.
Move your shift lever to “P” (Park) or
“N” (Neutral). Your engine won’t start in
any other position -- that’s a safety
feature. To restart when you’re already
moving, use “N” (Neutral) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to “P” (Park) if
your Pontiac is moving. If you do,
you could damage the transaxle.
Shift to “P” (Park) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
3
start your 3.1 Liter engine:
. Without pushing the accelerator pedal,
turn your ignition key to “Start.”
When the engine starts, let goof the
key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in “Start” for
longer than 15 seconds at a time will
cause your battery to be drained
much sooner. And the excessive
heat can damage your starter motor.
If it doesn’t start right away, hold your
key in “Start.” If it doesn’t start in
three seconds (or starts but then
stops), push the accelerator pedal
about one-quarter of the way down
for 12 more seconds, or until it starts.
If your engine still won’t start
(or starts but then stops), it could be
flooded with too much gasoline. Try
this:
Wait 15 seconds to let the starter
motor cool down. Then push your
accelerator pedalall the way to the
floor. Hold it there. Then hold the key
in “Start.” This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Whenthe
engine starts, let goof the key and the
accelerator pedal.If the engine still
doesn’t start, wait another 15 seconds
and do Step 3 again.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work
with the electronics in your vehicle.
If you add electrical parts or
accessories, you could change the
way the fuel injection system
operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer.
If you don’t, your engine might not
perform properly.
If you ever have to have your
vehicle towed, see the part ofthis
manual that tells how to doit
without damaging your vehicle.See
“Towing Your Pontiac” in the
Index.
To start your 3.8 Liter engine:
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal,
turn your ignition keyto “Start.”
When the engine starts, let go of the
key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in “Start” for
longer than 15 seconds at a time will
cause your battery to be drained
much sooner. And the excessive
heat can damage your starter motor.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or
starts but then stops), it could be
flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing your accelerator pedal all the
way to the floor and holding it there as
you hold the key in “Start” for about
three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the
pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline from the
engine. After waiting about 15
seconds, repeat the normal starting
procedure.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your
key in “Start” for about three to five
seconds at a time until your engine
starts. Wait about 15 seconds between
each try to help avoid draining your
battery.
/I
...
Features & Controls
w Driving Through Deep
w Starting Your Engine
Standing Water
(CONT)
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work
with the electronics in your vehicle.
If you add electrical parts or
accessories, you could change the
way the fuel injection system
operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer.
If you don’t, your engine might not
perform properly.
If you ever have to have your
vehicle towed, see the part of this
manual that tells how to do it
without damaging your vehicle. See
“Towing Your Pontiac” in the
Index.
If you drive tooquickly through
deep puddles or standing water,
water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly
damage your engine. If you can’t
avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive through them very
slowly.
...72
Engine Coolant Heater
(Engine Block Heater)
(OPTION)
In very cold weather, 0°F (-18°C) or
colder, theengine coolant heater can help.
You’ll get easier starting and betterfuel
economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be
plugged in a minimum of four hours prior
to starting your vehicle.
To use the coolant heater:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt outlet.
NOTICE:
After you’ve used the coolant
heater, be sure to store the cord as it
was before to keep it away from
moving engine parts. If you don’t, it
could be damaged.
e
How long should you keep the coolant
heater plugged in? The answer depends
on the weather, the kind of oil you have,
Shifting theAutomatic
and some other things.Instead of trying to
list everything here, we ask that you
Transaxle
contact a Pontiac dealer in the area where
you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer There are several different positions for
can give you the best advice for that
your shift lever. In this manual, these are
particular area.
referred to by the commonly used
symbols in the right column below:
Park
P
Reverse
R
Neutral
N
Overdrive
@
Drive
D
Second
2
First
1
Features & Controls
Park
Reverse
P (Park): This locks your front wheels.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
It’s the best position to use when you start
your engine because your vehicle can’t
move easily.
I
Index. if)you’re pulling a trailer,
see “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index.
NOTICE:
Shifting to “R” (Reverse) while
your vehicle is moving forward
could damage your transaxle. Shift
is
to “R” onlyafteryourvehicle
stopped.
I
I
To rock your vehicle back and forth to.
get out of snow, ice or sand without
damaging your transaxle. see “If You’re
Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the
Index.
... 74
I
Neutral
Forward Gears
d (Neutral): In this position, yourengine
loesn’t connect with the wheels. To
@ (Automatic Overdrive): If your
estart when you’re already moving, use
‘N” (Neutral) only. Also, use“N” when
’our vehicle is being towed.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transaxle caused by
shifting out of “ P ’ (Park) or “N”
(Neutral) with the engine racing
isn’t covered by your warranty.
automatic transaxle has automatic
overdrive, this position is for normal
driving. If you need more power for
passing, and you’re:
0
Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h),
push your accelerator pedal about
halfway down.
0
Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or
more, push the accelerator all the way
down.
You’ll shift down tothe next gear and
have more power.
75
...
Features & Controls
(Second Gear): This position gives you
lore power but lower fuel economy.
You
Ln use “2”on hills. It can help control
mr speed as you go down steep
lountain roads, but then you wouldalso
ant to use your brakes off and on.
Forward Gears(CONT.)
NOTICE:
This Notice applies only if you
have the 3.8L V6 engine and the
automatic Overdrive transaxle. If
your vehicle is so equipped, and if it
se’ernsto start up rather slowly, or if
it seems not to shift gears as you go
faster, something may be wrong
with a transaxle system sensor. If
you drive very far that way, your
vehicle can be damaged. So, if this
happens, have your vehicle serviced
right away. Until then, you can use
“2” (Second Gear) when you are
drivin less than 35 mph (56 km/h)
and D (Overdrive) for higher
speeds.
B
NOTICE:
D (Third Gear): If your automatic
transaxle does not have Overdrive, this
position is for normal driving, at all
speeds, in most street and highway
situations.
If your automatic transaxle has Overdrivc
“D’ is like @, but you never go into
Overdrive. Here are some times you
might choose “D” instead of @:
When driving on hilly, winding roads
When towing a trailer, so there is less
shifting between gears
When going down a steep hill
... 76
Don’t drive in “2” (Second Gear)
for more than 5 miles (8 km), or at
speeds over 55 mph (88 km/h), or
you can damage your transaxle. Use
“D” (@ or “D” if your vehicle has
Overdrive) as much as possible.
Don’t shift into “2” unless you are
going slower than 65 mph (105
km/h), or you can damage your
engine.
o Release the Parking Brake:
1 (First Gear): This position gives you
even more power (but lower fuel
economy) than “2”. You can use it on
very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the selector leveris put in “I”, the
transaxle won’t shift into first gear until
the vehicle is going slowly enough.
old the regular brake pedal down with
3ur right foot while you push down on
le parking brake pedal with your left foot.
To release the tension onthe parking
-ake cable,you will need to apply about
le same amount of pressure to the parking
-ake pedal as you did when you set the
Irking brake.) When you remove your
pot from the parking brake pedal, it will
3p up to the release position.
NOTICE:
If your front wheels can’t rotate,
don’t try to drive. This might
happen if you were stuck in very
deep sand or mud or were up
against a solid object. You could
damage yourtransaxle.
Also, if you stop when going uphill,
don’t hold your vehiclethere with
only the accelerator pedal. This
could overheat and damage the
transaxle. Use your brakes to hold
your vehicle in position on a hill.
Parking Brake
To Set the Parking Brake:
Hold the regular brake pedal down with
your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot. If the
ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will come on. See “Brake System
Warning Light” in the Index.
-
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on
can cause your rear brakes to
overheat. You may have to replace
them, and you could also damage
other parts of your vehicle.
‘You are Towing a Trailer and are
xking on Any Hill: See “Towing a
railer” in the Index. That section shows
hat to do first to keep the trailer from
loving.
77
C
Features & Controls
Shifting Into 66P 99
(Park)
2. Move the shift lever into “P” (Park)
position like this:
0
Pull the lever toward you.
Move the lever up as far as it
will go.
3. Move the ignition key to Lock.
4. Remove the key and take it with you.
If you can walk. awayfrom your
vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicleis in “P”(Park).
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your
right foot and set theparking brake.
eo.78
Leaving Your Vehicle With
the Engine Running
If you have to leave your vehicle with the
engine running, be sure your vehicle is in
“P” (Park) and your parking brake is
firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into the “P’
(Park) position, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from “P’ (Park)
without first pulling it toward you.If you
can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t
fully locked into “P’(Park).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t
shift your transaxle into “P” (Park)
properly, the weight of the vehicle may
put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to
pull the shift lever out of “P” (Park). This
is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque
lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into “P” (Park) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see
“Shifting Into ‘P’ (Park)” in the Index.
r
When you are ready to drive, move the
shift lever out of “P” (Park) BEFORE you
release the parking brake.
If “torque lock” does occur, you may
need to have another vehicle push .yours a
Little uphill to take some of the pressure
from the transaxle, so you can pull the
shift lever out of “P’ (Park).
79...
Features & Controls
Engine Exhaust
I
Parking Over Things
That Burn
Running Your Engine
While You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine
running. But if you ever have to, here are
some things to know.
...80
r
I
Tilt Wheel (OPTION)
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust
the steering wheel before you drive.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your
vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into
‘P’ (Park)” in the Index.
If you are pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
Horn
You can sound the horn by pressing the
horn symbols on your steering wheel.
You can also raise it to the highest level to
give your legs more room when you exit
and enter the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel
and pull the lever. Move the steering
wheel to a comfortable level, then release
the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Manual Windows
Use the manual crank to open and close
the front windows.
81
...
Features & Controls
Side Window Latches
Power Windows (OPTION)
Turn Signal/
Multifunction Lever
With power windows, switches on the
driver’s door armrest control thefi-ont
The lever on the left side of the steering
windows when the ignition is on. The left
column includes your:
To Open: Pull the latch forward to release switch controls the driver’s window.The
it, then swing the window outward and
right switch controls the passenger’s window.
0 Turn Signal and Lane Change
press the center of the latch to secure the
Indicator
The driver’s power window switch has
window in the open position.
two down positions. Hold the rear of the
0 HeadlightHigh-Low Beam
To Close: Pull the center of the latch
switch in the first position to lower the
forward and then close the latch.
0 CruiseControl (Option)
window normally.
The rear of the sidewindows swings
open.
To activate the auto down feature, fully
press the rear of the switch, then release.
The window will lower completely. To
stop the window from lowering all the
way, press the front of the switch.
...a2
To raise the window, press and hold the
front of the switch.
The High-Low Beam feature is discussed
under “Headlights”. See “Headlights”in
the Index.
I If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help
11.
‘
Turn Signal andLane
Change Indicator
A green arrow on the instrument panel
will flash in the direction of the turn or
lane change.
The turn signal has two upward (for
Right) and twodownward (for Left)
positions. These positions allow you to
signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a lane change, just raise or
lower the lever until the green arrow starts
to flash. Hold it there until you complete
your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
To signal a turn, move the lever allthe
way up or down. When the turn is
finished, the lever will return
automatically.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if
the arrows don’t flash but just stay on, a
signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers won’t see your turn signal.
avoid an accident. If the green arrows
don’t go on at all when you signal a turn,
check the fuse (see“Fuses & Circuit
Breakers” in the Index) and for
burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with
added wiring for the trailer lights, a
different turn signal flasher is used. With
this flasher installed, the signal indicator
will flash even if a turn signal bulb is
burned out. Check the front and rear turn
signal lights regularly to make sure they
are working.
Features & Controls
When you apply your brakes, the Cruise
Clontrol shuts off.
To Set Cruise Control
I. Move the Cruise Control switch to
“ON’.
Cruise Control (OPTION)
With Cruise Control, you can maintain a
speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator. This can really help on long
trips.
Cruise Control does not work at speeds
below about 25 mph (40 kmh).
...84
2. Get up to the speed you want.
the case, you will not be able to resume
your set speed by moving the cruise
control switch to “RESUME/ACCEL”.
Use the “SET” button to reset cruise (see
“To Set Cruise Control” earlier in this
section).
3. Push in the set button at the end of the
lever and release it.
4. Take your fo-otoff the accelerator
pedal.
To Resume a Set Speed
Suppose you set your Cruise Control at a
desired speed and then you apply the
brake. This, of course, shuts off the
Cruise Control. But you don’t need to
reset it. Once you’re going about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more, you can move the
Cruise Control switch from “ON” to
“RESUME/ACCEL” (which stands for
Resume/Accelerate) for about half a
second.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen
speed and stay there.
If you have the 3800 Vb engine, cruise
control memory will be erased when you
place the transaxle in “P” (Park). If this is
If you hold the switch at “Resume/,Accel”
longer than half a second, the vehicle will
keep going faster until you release the
switch or apply the brake. You could be
startled and even lose control. So unless
you want to go faster, don’t hold the
switch at “Resume/Accel”.
To Increase Speed Wh#e
Using Cruise Control
:
There are two ways to go to a highkr
speed. Here’s the first:
0
Use the accelerator pedal to get.to the
higher speed.
0
Push the button atthe end of the lever,
then release the button and the
accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at
the higher speed.
Features & Controls
To Increase Speed While
(CONT.)
Using Cruise Control
Here’s the second way to go to a higher
speed:
@
0
To slow down in very small amounts,
push the button for less than half a
second. Each time you do this, you’ll
go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle
Move the Cruise switch from “ON” to
While Using Cruise
“RESUME/ACCEL”.Hold it there
until you get up to the speed you want, Control
and then release the switch.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your
speed. When you take your foot off the
To increase your speed in very small
pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the
amounts, move the switch to
“RESUME/ACCEL” for less than half Cruise Control speed you set earlier.
a second and then release it. Each time
you do this, your vehicle will go about Using Cruise Control on
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Hills
The accelerate feature will only work
after you’ve set the initial cruise control
speed by pushing the “SET” button. If
you have the 3.1L V6 engine, the
accelerate feature will work whether or
not you have set an initial cruise control
speed.
To Reduce Speed While
Using Cruise Control
Push in the button at the end of the
lever until you reach the lower speed
you want, then release it.
How well your Cruise Control will work
on hills depends upon your speed, load,
and the steepness of the hills. When going
up steep hills, you may have to step on
the accelerator pedal to maintain your
speed. When going downhill, you may
have to brake or shift to a lower gear to
keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of
Cruise Control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use Cruise
Control on steep hills.
To Get Out of Cruise
Control
rhere are two ways toturn off the Cruise
Control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal; OR
0
Move the Cruise switch to “OFF”.
To Erase Speed Memory
When you turn off the Cruise Control or
the ignition, your Cruise Control set speed
memory is erased. If you have the 3800
V6 engine, cruise control memorywill
also be erased when you place the
transaxle in “P” (Park).
Operation of Lights
Although your vehicle's lighting system
(headlights, parking lights, fog lamps,
side marker lights and taillights) meetall
applicable federal lighting requirements,
certain states and provinces may apply
their own lighting regulations that may
require special attention before you
operate these lights.
I Headlights
'ush the p' switch to turn on:
1
Parking Lights
1
Side Marker Lights
D
Taillights
D
InstrumentPanel Lights
lull the switchto turn off the lights.
For example, some jurisdictions may
require that you operate your fog lamps
only when your lower beam headlights
are also on, orthat headlights be turned
on whenever you must use your
windshield wipers. In addition, most
jurisdictions prohibit driving solely with
parking lights, especially at dawn or dusk.
It is recommended that you check with
your own state or provincial highway
authority for applicable lighting
regulations.
a7
...
Features & Controls
The ignition is on
Lights On Reminder
If you turn the ignition key to the off or
Lock position while leaving the lights on,
you will hear a warning chime.
Daytime Running Lights
(Canada Only)
The Canadian Federal Government has
decided that Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) are a useful feature, in that DRL
can make your vehicle more visible to
pedestrians and other drivers during
daylight hours. DRL are required on new
vehicles sold in Canada.
0
The headlight switch is off, and
0
The parking brake is released.
At dusk, the exterior lights will come on
automatically and the low beams will
change to full brightness. At dawn, the
exterior lights will go out and the low
beams will change to the reduced
brightness of DRL (if the headlight switch
is off). Of course, you may still turn on
the headlights any time you need to.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set
the parking brake while the ignition is in
the off or Lock position. Then start the
Your DRL work with a light sensor on top vehicle. The DRL will stay off until you
of the instrument panel. Don’t cover it up. release the parking brake.
The low beam headlights will come on at
reduced brightness in daylight when:
Yeadlight High-Low Beam
?hanger
:o change the headlights from low beam
o high or high to low, pull the turn signal
ever all the way toward you. Then
elease it.
Nhen the high beams are on, a blue light
In the instrument panel also will be on.
.
interior Lights Control
Slide the lower controlup to turn on the
interior lights, down toturn them off.
Your standard front overhead console
control can be overridden by the interior
lights override switch located in the
console. See “Interior Lights Override
Switch” in the Index.
I
Instrument Panel Intensity Fog Lights
Controi
Slide the lower control up to turn on the
Slide the upper control up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights,
down to decrease the brightness. Slide the
control all the way down to turn them off.
fog lights, down to turn them off. An
amber indicator light next to the control
will glow when the fog lights are on.
Your headlights must be on for your fog
lights to go on.
Although your fog lights will go on when
your high beams are on, high beams are
not recommended for driving in fog.
89...
Features & Controls
U
For Pulse Delay Wiper Cycles: The
pulse delay cycle system allows you to set
The windshield wiper and washer controls the wiper speed as slow as 20 seconds
are located to the right of the instrument between cycles, or faster. Pulse delay
cycles are very useful in light rain or
cluster.
snow. Slide the upper control to the
For a Single Wiper Cycle: Press the
“DELAY” area. The lower the position,
switch marked “MIST” and release. For
the slower the cycle; the higher the
more cycles, press and hold the switch.
position, the faster the cycle.
Windshield Wipers
... 90
or Steady Wiper Cycles:Slide the
pper control either to the“LO” or “HI”
xition, depending on the wiper speed
3u want.
I
To Turn the Wipers Off: Slide the upper
control to the “OFF” position.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will stop
the motor until it cools. Clear away snow
or ice to prevent an overload.
Windshield Washer
To wash your windshield, press and hold
the windshield washer switch. The
washers and wipers will operate. When
you release the switch, the washers will
stop, and the wipers will continue to
operate for two cycles, unless your wipers
had already been on. In that case, the
wipers will resume the wiper speed you
had selected earlier.
Features & Controls
ng as the control is held in that position.
nen thewiperwillreturnto
“DEL”.
NOTICE:
0
0
Rear Window Wiper and
Washer
To Use Your Rear Wiper: Slide the
lower control to
cycles.
for steady wiping
For a Delayed Wiper Cycle: Slide the
“DEL”.
lower control to
0
To Wash the Rear Window: Slide the
lower control to
and hold it. The
washer and wiper will operate only as
a
...
YL
Whenusing concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
Don’t mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage your
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water doesn’t clean as
well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank
only 3/4 full when it’s very
cold. This allows for
expansion, which could
damage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use radiator antifreeze
in your windshield washer. It
can damage your washer
system and paint.
Interior Lights
Override Switch
This switch is located to the left of the
cigarette lighter on the center instrument
panel console. It hastwo positions
“DOOR” (on) and “OFF”, and overrides
all interior lights except the reading lights.
The interior lights go on each time you
open the doors.You can turn off these
lights so that the doors may be left open
without running down the batteryby
turning the interior lights override switch
to “OFF”.
If the interior lights override switch in the
center instrument panel console is in the
“OFF’ position, the overhead lights will
remain off when the doors open. See
“Interior Lights Override Switch” earlier
in this section.
There are also two lights in the liftgate to
light the rear cargo area. These will come
on each time youopen the liftgate, unless
the interior lights override switch is in the
“OFF” position.
Interior Lights
To turn the interior lights on when the
doors are closed, slide the interior lights
Your vehicle has two overhead dome
control up to the “ON” position (the rear
lights-one in the center of the passenger dome light switch mustbe in the on
compartment and onein the rear. If you
position). See “Interior Lights Control”
have the optional rear climate control, you earlier in this section.
will not have a center dome light.
The rear dome light has an on-offswitch;
the center dome light has no switch. Both
lights will go on each time you open the
front doors unless you have the rear light
switched off.
Front Reading Lights
There are two reading lights located in the
optional front overhead console. To turn
on or off either reading light, press the
switch next to it.
If you have the optional power sliding
door, your overhead console will also
have two power sliding door switches. To
operate these switches, see “Power
Sliding Door” in the Index.
93...
Features & Controls
Rear Reading Lights
Accessory Power Outlet
The rear dome light also has two reading
lights.
The power outlet is located in the rear
compartment on the driver’s side. To
open, slide the latch down and remove the
cover. If you have the optional
saddlebags, lift the saddlebag flap to
expose the latch.
To turn on either reading light, press the
switch next to it.
The power outlet can be used to plug in
electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone, CB radio, etc. Follow the
proper installation instructions that are
included with any electrical equipment
you install.
...94
When not in use, always cover the outlet
with the protective cap.
NOTICE:
When using the accessory power
outlet:
a Maximum load of any
electrical equipment should
not exceed 20 amps.
a Be sure to turn off any
electrical equipment when
not in use. Leaving electrical
equipment on for extended
periods can drain your.
battery.
Air Inflator System
(OPTION)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an air
inflator. With it, you can inflate things
like air mattresses and basketballs, and
you can also use it to bring your tires up
to the proper pressure.
’he air inflator kit is stored in a pouch in
he glove box or, if you have the optional
addlebags, in the driver side saddlebag.
t includes a 20-foot (6 m) hose with an
ir pressure gage, nozzle adapters and
nstructions.
To use your air inflator system, attach the
appropriate nozzle adapter, if required, to
the end of the hose that has the pressure
gage. Then attach that end of the hose to,
the object you wish to inflate. Remove the
protective cap covering the outlet. Attach
the other end of the hose to the outlet.
Press the “ON” switch. The “ON” switch
will work even with the ignition off.
The air inflator is located in the rear
compartment on the driver’s side. The
compartment door latch is located at the
top of the cover. If you have the optional
saddlebags, lift the flap on the saddlebag
to expose the latch. To open the
compartment, slide the latch down and
remove the cover.
950..
Features & Controls
Air Inflator System
(CONK)
Your air inflator will automatically shut
off after about 10 minutes. To reset, press
the “ON” switch again.
Don’t run your air inflator for longer than
30 minutes at one time. If you do, you
may damage the system. After 30
minutes, wait at least 10 minutes before
restarting the air inflator.
To turn off the inflator, press “OFF” and
detach the hose, first fi-om the inflated
object, then from the outlet. Replace the
protective cap. Place the inflator kit tools
in the pouch, and store in the glove box.
...96
Inside Day/Night
Rearview Mirror
To reduce glare from lights behind you,
pull the lever toward you to the night
position.
Convex Outside Mirror
Your right side mirror is convex.
A convex mirror’s surface is curved so
you can see more from the driver’sseat.
.'
Manual Remote
Control Mirrors
Both the driver and passenger side outside
mirrors can be adjusted with the control
lever on each door so that you can just see
the side of your vehicle when you are
sitting in a comfortable driving position.
Both outside mirrors can be folded
forward or rearward. In the rearward
position, they will fold flush with the
vehicle. This feature is particularly useful
in automatic car washes and when
maneuvering your vehicle in narrow
spaces.
Power Remote Control
The control on the driver's door controls
both outside rearview mirrors. Turn the
control to the left to select the driver side
rearview mirror, or to the right to select
the passenger side rearview mirror. Then
use the control to adjust each mirror so
that you can just see the side of your
vehicle when you are sitting in a
comfortable driving position.
Both outside mirrors can be folded forward
or rearward. In the rearward position, they
will fold flush with the vehicle. This
feature is particularly useful in automatic
car washes and when maneuvering your
vehicle in narrow spaces.
97..
.
Features & Controls
Glove BoxlStorage
Compartment
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down
the visors. You can also remove them
from the center mount and swingthem to
the side. If the visors swing too easily,
tighten the screw on the rear of the visors.
Your vehicle has a storage compartment
on top of the dash anda glove box below
it.
To open the storage compartment, pushin
the latch release, then lift the lid.
...98
To remove the ashtray for cleaning,close
the lid, then grasp the rear edge of the
ashtray with your fingertips and pull up
and out, in a rocking motion.
To use the lighter, push it in all the way
and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop
back by itself.
NOTICE:
To open the glove box, pinch the latch
release.
The fuse panel is located inside the glove
box door. See “Fuses & Circuit Breakers’
in the Index.
Cup Holders1
AshtraylLighter
Two cup holders, an ashtray and a lighter
are located in the center instrument panel
console.
The foam cup holder liners can be
removed for cleaning. Should the liners
ever become damaged, see your dealer for
replacement.
To use the ashtray, lift the lid.
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with
your hand while it is heating. If you
do, it won’t be able to back away
from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make it overheat,
damaging the lighter and the heating
element.
NOTICE:
Don’t put papers and other things
that burn into your ashtrays. If you
do, cigarettes or other smoking
materials could set them on fire,
causing damage.
99.e.
Features & Controls
Locking Storage Bin
At the base of the center instrument panel
console is a storage bin. Use the door key
to lock and unlock it. To open the bin,
pinch the latch release. You may have a
coinholder inside the storage bin.
To replace the bin, set the hinge pins (one
Rear Storage
on each sideof the bin, at the bottom) into
Compartment and
the hinge guides (one at each side of the
console opening, at the base), then close
Ashtray
the bin. If the hinge pins are placed
The rear ashtray is located in the rear
properly in the guides, the bin will close
storage compartment.
easily.
To remove the bin for cleaning, open it
part way, then pull out and slightly up.
To open the ashtray, pressone side and
turn it open.
To clean the inside of the bin, vacuum or
wipe with a slightly damp cloth.
To remove the ashtray for cleaning, press
the snuffer as you lift up the bottom of the
ashtray.
. . . 100
The side of the convenience net closest to
the front ofthe vehicle is higher than the
side closest the liftgate. Once you've
loaded items into the net, stretch the
higher side of the net up and over the top
of the load to hold it firmly in place.
The convenience net has a maximum
capacity of 100 pounds (45 kg). It is not
designed to holder larger, heavier loads.
Store such loads on the floor of your
vehicle, as far forward as you can.
I Convenience Net
When not in use, we recommend that you
take down the convenience net to extend
(OPTION)
its life and retain its elasticity, and to keep
'he optional convenience net is designed the rear exit clear. Store the net in the
pouch behind either front seat or in one of
3 help keep small loads, like grocery
lags, from falling over during sharp turns the optional saddlebags.
r quick stops and starts.
The optional saddlebags provide extra
storage space. They are located at the rear
of your vehicle, attached to the covers on
the two rear compartments.
nstall the convenience net at the rear of
our vehicle,just inside the liftgate.
ittach the upper loops to the posts on
ither side of the liftgate opening (the
lbel on the net should be in the upper
ght-hand corner). Attach the lower
lops to the hooks on the floor.
101
...
Features & Controls
Luggage Carrier
NOTICE:
(OPTION)
Loading cargo that weighs more
than 125 pounds (56 kg) on the
luggage carrier may damage your
vehicle. When you carry cargo on
the luggage carrierof a proper size
and weight, putit on the slats, as far
forward as you can and distribute
the load evenly along the slats. Then
slide the crossrailup against the rear
of the load, to help keepit from
moving. You can then tie it down.
If you have the optional luggage carrier,
you can load things on top of your
vehicle. The luggage carrier has slats and
side rails attached to the roof, sliding
crossrails and places to use for tying
things down. These let you load some
things on top of your vehicle, so long as
they are not wider or longer than the
luggage carrier.
.. 102
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle
capacity when loading your Pontiac. For
more information on vehicle capacity and
loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle’’ in
the Index.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as
you’re driving, check now and thento
make sure the luggage carrier andcargo
are still securely fastened.
Your luggage carrier has release knobs set
in the ends of each crossrail. Turn the
release knobs counterclockwise, then
slide the crossrails forward or back, as
needed, to accommodate loads of varying
size.
Use the adjustable tiedown loops in the
side rails to help secure large loads:
Reposition the tiedowns by turning them
counterclockwise, then slide them Along
the side rail. Turn the tiedowns clodkwise
to tighten them in place.
. .:
/’
After repositioning the crossrails, be sure
to tighten the release knobs by turning
them clockwise, locking the crossrails in
place.
Tiedowns may be removed and used in
the adjustable tapped plates in the
crossrails. You may also use these tapped
plates to secure bicycle or ski racks.
1:
103...
Features & Controls
rn Electronic Level
Control (OPTION)
To Close the Sunroof:
Pull the latch release handle forward and
down, then push it back and up. Press
firmly to lock the latch release handleintl
the closed position.
With this option, the rear of the vehicle
automatically adjust to changes in load
weight. (See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.)
NOTICE:
You may hear the compressor operating
when you load or unload your vehicle,
and periodically as the system
self-adjusts. This is normal.
The compressor should operate for brief
periods of time. If the sound continues for
an extended period of time, your vehicle
needs service. To keep your battery from
being drained, you may want to remove
the 20-amp ELC fuse in the fuse control
panel until you can get your vehicle
serviced (see “Fuses & Circuit Breakers”
in the Index).
. . . 104
rn Sunroof
(OPTION)
This feature may not be available on your
vehicle.
The sunroof has a glass panel that opens
for ventilation.
To Open the Sunroof:
Pull down on the latch release handle and
then push it forward and up until the glass
panel locks into place.
The optional sunroof panel is not
designed to be removed. It is made
to open and close but to remain
attached to the vehicle.
6
I’
I
The InstrumentPanel-Your Information System
3ur instrument panel is designed to let
)u know at a glance how your vehicleis
nning. You’ll know how fast you’re
jing, how much fuel you’re using, and
any other things you’ll needto drive
fely and economically.
Refer to the accompanying diagrams of
your instrument panel, center console and
instrument cluster.
1. Exterior Lights
3. Front Fog Lamps
4. Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls
5. Rear Wiper Control
2. I/P Light Dimmer
IOS...
Features & Controls
1. Vents
2. Parking Brake Pedal
3. Glove Compartment And Fuse
Center
..
106
1. HVAC Controls
2. Rear Window Defog (Opt.)
3. Radio
4. Traction Control Switch (Opt.)
5. Courtesy Lamp Override
6. Cigar Lighter
7. Rear HVAC Controls (Opt.)
8. Open Storage Area
9. Ashtray
10. Locking Storage Bin
11. Bucket, Removes For Cleaning
12. Air Vent
107..
.
Features & Controls
Engine Instrument Panel Cluster
7. Voltage Gage
14. High Beam Indicator
15. Service Traction Control
1. Traction Control “ON”
8. Oil Pressure Indicator 3.1 L
(Shown)/Oil Pressure Gage
3800 (Similar)
2. Service Air Bag
9. Tachometer
four cluster includes indicator warning
ights and gages that are explained on the
ollowing pages.
3. Service Engine Soon
4. Sliding Door Ajar Symbol
5. Liftgate Ajar
6. Park Brake/Fluid Level Indicator
. e .
I08
IO. Seat Belts
11. Right Turn Signal
12. Service Antilock Brakes
13. Speedometer
16. Left Turn Signal
17. Odometer
18. Trip Odometer Reset
19. Trip Odometer
20. Fuel Gage
21. Low Fuel Warning
22. Coolant Temperature Gage
Tamper Resistant
Odometer
Your Pontiac has a tamper resistant
odometer. If you see silver lines between
the numbers, you’ll know that someone
has probably tried to turn it back, so the
numbers may not be true.
You may wonder what happens if your
vehicle needs a new odometer installed. If
the new one can be set to the mileage total
of the old odometer, then it must be. But
Speedometer and
Tachometer
if it can’t, then it’s setat zero and a label
Odometer
The tachometer displays the enginespeed
must be put on the driver’s door to show
in revolutions per minute (rpm).
Your speedometer lets you see your speed the old mileage reading when the new
odometer was installed.
in both miles per hour (mph) and
kilometers per hour(km/h). Your
NOTICE:
odometer shows how far your vehicle has
Do not operate the engine with the
been driven, in either miles (usedin the
tachometer in the red area, or engine
U.S.) or kilometers (usedin Canada).
damage may occur.
109.
..
Features & Controls
H
Warning Lights, Gages
and Indicators
This section describes the warning lights
and gages that may be on your vehicle.
The pictures will help you locate them.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far
your vehicle has been driven since you
last set it to zero. To set it to zero, push
the reset button located above the fuel
gage.
... 110
Warning lights and gages can signal that
something is wrong before it becomes
serious enough to cause an expensive
repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also
save you or others from injury.
Warning lights go on when there may be
or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s
functions. As you will see in the details
on the next few pages, some warning
lights come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key just to let you know they’re
working. If you are familiar with this
section, you should not be alarmed when
this happens.
Sages can indicate when there may be or
is a problem with one of your vehicle’s
Functions. Often gages and warning lights
work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on
and stays on when you are driving, or
when one of the gages shows theremay
be a problem, check the section that tells
you what to do about it. Please follow the
manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs
can be costly -- and even dangerous. So
please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Here are four things that some owners ask
about. None of these show a problem with
your fuel gage:
At the service station, the gas pump
shuts off before the gage reads “F”
(Full).
Fuel Gage
Your fuel gage tells you about how much
fuel you have left, when the ignition is on.
When the gage first indicates “E”
(Empty), you still have a little fuel left,
but you should get more soon.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill
up than the gage indicated. For
example, the gage may have indicated
the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The gage moves a little when you turn
a corner, brake or speed up.
When there is between 3 gallons
(1 1 liters) and 0.5 gallon (1.8 liters) of
The gage doesn’t go back to “E” when fuel left in the tank, the warning light next
to the fuel symbol will go on.
you turn off the ignition.
For your fuel tank capacity, see “Service
Station Information’’ on the last page of
this manual.
This light will also come on when you
turn on the ignition, but the engine is not
running, to show you it is working. If it
doesn’t come on as you start your vehicle,
have it fixed right away.
111
...
Features & Controls
'/
H
4
i
WJ
-1
I20
'I
/ ,1
Ys
0
0-c
w
Oil Pressure Indicator
(3.I L V6 Engine)
Your vehicle is equipped with an oil pressure
indicator rather than an oil pressure gage.
Your oil pressure indicator lets you know
when you may have a problem with your
engine oil pressure.
When the engine is running, readings within
the whte graduation band indicate the normal
operating range. Readings in or below the red
area indicate that the engine's
oil level may be
dangerously low, or there may be another
problem causing low oil pressure.
Driving your vetucle with lowoil pressure
can cause extensive engine damage. Have
your vehicle serviced immediately.
... 112
I NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from
neglected oil problems can be costly
and is not covered by your warranty.
Oil Pressure Gage
(3800 V6 Engine)
Your oil pressure gage shows the oil
pressure in psi (pounds per square inch)
when the engine is running. Canadian
vehicles indicate pressure in kPa
(kilopascals). Oil pressure may vary with
engine speed, outside temperature andoil
viscosity. In fact, while the engine is
warming up, the oil pressure will be
higher than at the normal operating
temperature. Readings above the red
warning zone indicate the normal
operating range.
I If- - the gage readsin the red warning zone,
your engine’s oil level may be
dangerously low or there may be
another
problem causing low oil pressure.
Driving your vehiclewith low oil
pressure can cause extensive engine
damage. Have your vehicle serviced
immediately.
Voltmeter
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from
neglected oil problems can be costly
and is not covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage
Your charging system gage will show the
rate of charge when the engine is running. This gage shows the engine coolant
temperature. If the gage pointer moves
The reading will change as therate of
charge changes (with engine speed, etc.), into the red area, your engine is too hot! It
means that your engine coolant has.
but readings between the red warning
overheated. If you have been operating
zones indicate the normal operating
your vehicle under normal driving
range. Readings in either red zone
conditions, you should pull off the road,
indicate a possible problem with your
stop your vehicle and turn off the engine
charging system. Have your Pontiac
as
soon as possible.
serviced immediately.
HOT COOLANT CAN BURN YOU
When the engine is not running but the
BADLY!
ignition is on(in the Run position), the
clisplay measures the voltage output of
In “Problems on the Road”, this manual
your battery.
shows what to do. See “Engine
Overheating” in the Index.
113
...
Features & Controls
I
carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go
closer to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light is stillon, or if the
anti-lock brake system warning light is
flashing, have the vehicle towed for
service. (See “Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light” and “Towing Your
Pontiac” in the Index.)
Brake System Warning
Light
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
Your Pontiac’s hydraulic brake system is
divided into two parts. If one part isn’t
working, the other part can still work and
stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
With anti-lock, this light will go on when
you start your engine andit will stay on
for three seconds. That’s normal.If the
light doesn’t come on, have it fixed so it
will be readyto warn you if there is a
problem.
If the warning light comes on, there coulc
be a brake problem. Have your brake
system inspected right away.
This light should come on as you start thc
vehicle. If it doesn’t come on then, have i
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are
driving, pull off the road and stop
.. 114
The brake system warning light will also
come on when you set your parking
brake, and-it will stay on if your parking
brake doesn’t release fully.If it stays on
after your parking brake is fully released,
it means you have a brake problem.
If the light flashes when you’re driving,
you don’t have anti-lock brakes and
there’s a problem with your regular brakes.
Pull off the road and stop carefully.You
may notice that the pedalis harder to push.
Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It
may take longer to stop. Have the vehicle
towed for service. (See “TowingYour
Pontiac” in the Index.)
I A CAUTION:
I
Your regular brake systemmay not
be working properly if the anti-lock
brake system warning light is
flashing. Driving with the anti-lock
brake system warning light fashing
can lead to an accident. After
you’ve pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle
towed for service.
~~~
~~~~
~~
~~~~~~~
LOW
TRACTION
traction control system limits wheel spin
for less than four seconds. Otherwise, the
light will go out as soon as the anti-lock
system stops ad-justing brake pressure or
the traction control system stops limiting
wheel spin. The “LOW TRACTION”
light also comes on briefly, a s a bulb
check, when the engine is started.
I
I
NOTICE:
~
If the anti-lock brake system warning
light stays on longer than normal after
you’ve started your engine, turn the
ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and
stays on when you’re driving, stop as
soon a s possible and turn the ignition off.
Then start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light still stays on, or conles
on again while you’re driving, your
Pontiac needs service. If the light is on
but not flashing and the regular brake
system warning light isn’t on. you still
have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock
brakes.
Low Traction Light
(OPTION: 3800 V6 ENGINE)
If your vehicle has the traction control
system, there will be a ”LOW
TRACTION” light on the instrument
panel. It is located above the “AIR RAG”
light. When your anti-lock system is
adjusting brake pressure to help avoid a
braking skid. or when your traction
control system is limiling wheel spin, the
“LOW TRACTION” light will come o n .
Slippery road conditions may exist if this
light comes on. so adjust your driving
accordingly. The light will come on and
stay on for four seconds when your
anti-lock system adjusts brake pressure
f o r less than four seconds or when your
Spinning your wheels when the
“TCS” warning light is on can
destroy parts of your vehicle as well
a s the tires. If you spin you wheels
too fast while shifting your transaxle
back and forth. you can destroy
your transaxle. When you‘re stuck.
spin the wheels a s little as possible.
115
...
Features & Controls
If the “TCS” warning light comes on and
stays onfor an extended period of time,
your vehicle needs service.
.
Traction Control System
Warning Light
(OPTION: 3800 V6 ENGINE)
The “TCS” (Traction Control System)
warning light means that the system is not
working.
The “TCS” warning light may come on if
your brakes overheat. This means that
your traction control system has
temporarily shut down to allow the brakes
to cool. (The control system will not shut
down while it is actively controlling
wheel spin.) When the brakes have cooled
down, the “TCS” warning light will go
off.
. 116
.
Walfunction Indicator
Lamp (Service Engine
Soon Light)
1 computer monitors operation of your
uel, ignition and emission control
,ystems.This light should come on whe:n
he ignition is on, but the engine is not
,unning, as a check to show you it is
vorking. If it does not come on atall,
lave itkxed right away. If it stays on, or
t comes on while you are driving, the
:omputer is indicating that you havea
Jroblem. You should take your vehicle in
for service soon.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle
with this light on, after a while^ the
emission controls won’t work as
well, your fuel economy won’t beas
good and your engine may not run
as smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs not covered by your
warranty.
Liftgate Ajar Warning
Light
The liftgate ajar symbol on your
instrument panel will come on if your
liftgate is not completely closed.
117...
Features & Controls
Sliding Door Ajar Warning
Light
With the optional power sliding door, the
sliding door ajar symbol on your
instrument panel will come on if your
sliding door is not completely closed.
If you shift the transaxle out of“P” (Park
while the sliding door is open or i n the
process of closing, and the power sliding
door enable switch is in the “ON”
position, the sliding door ajar symbol
light will flash and a buzzer will sound.
This is a warning that the sliding door is
not completely closed.
... 118
tf you manually slam the power sliding
door shut when the ignition is on, the
sliding door ajar symbol warning light
may come on and stay on. To turn the
light off, reopen and close the door using
either power door switch, or manually
open and close the door again more
slowly.
Part 3
Comfort Controls & Audio Systems
I n this part you’ll find out how to
operate the comfort control systems
and audio systems offered with your
Pontiac. Be sure to read about the
particular system supplied with your
vehicle .
. . . 120
Climate Control System Quick Reference Guide . . . . . . . .
. . . 121
Heater and Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 123
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 125
Rear Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defogging and
Defrosting
..
.........................
. . . . . 127
Rear Window
Defogger
.........................
. . . . . . . . . . . 128
Setting the
Clock
..............................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
131
AM/FM Stereo Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM/FM Stereo with Cassette Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
133
AM/FM Stereo with Cassette Player and Graphic Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
AM/FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Graphic Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
CD Player Anti-Theft Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
143
Steering Wheel Touch Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Radio Reception ..........................
. . . . . . . . 144
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
Care
Your
of
Compact Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Integrated
Roof
Antenna
..........
.......
. . . . . . . . . . . 146
119
C
...
Comfort Controls & Audio Systems
Climate Control System
Quick Reference Guide
Your Climate Control System
has been designed to provide an
expanded range of comfort options.
Use ,thisdiagram as a quick
reference guide for operating the
controls. For a complete explanation
of this system, see “Climate Control
System” later in this section.
SUGGESTED OPERATlNG MODES:
FRONTFANCONTROL
LEVER
-
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Press to turn the A/C on
and off.
-
R. DEF (Rear Defog)
Press to defog the rear
window.
DIRECTIONAL
CONTROLS
OFF
Press to turnthe system
-A lighted button lets
Off.
you know thata
selected control is on.
FRONT TEMPERATURE CONTROL LEVER
REAR FAN
FOR HEAT, USE
FOR VENT (OUTSIDE AIR), USE
7
U
OFF REAR LO MED HI
u
FOR MAX COOLING, USE
FOR OTHER AlC OPTIONS, USE
These positions allow the
driver to adjust the rear
This position transfers controlof the rearfan to
the second row passenger (for vehicles with
the
Rear Climate Control option only).
.. . I20
OFF: Press to turn the system off. Press
any function to turn the system on.
The “BI-LEV” setting directs outside air
into your vehicle in two ways. Cooler air
is directed toward your upper body
: Slide the lever to theright to
through the front instrument panel outlets,
increase fan speed, to the left to decrease while warmed air is directed through the
fan speed.
heater ducts at your feet. At times this
temperature difference may be more
Temperature Control Lever: Slide the
apparent than others. For the best results,
lever to the right for warmer, heated air;
slide the temperature control lever to the
slide it to the left for cooled air.
middle position, and then adjust it for
UPPER: This setting brings in outside air comfort.
through the instrument panel outlets. You
LOWER: This setting brings in most
may
the air using the temperature
Heater andVentilation controlwarm
heated air through the heater ducts, and
lever.
some through the defroster vents.
System
BI-LEV (Bi-Level): This setting is
Your vehicle’s heater will work bestif
designed for use on sunny days when the MIX: Because of your Trans Sport’s
larger windshield area, this mode is
you keep your windows closed. Your
air is only moderately warm or cool. On
particularly useful during cold or
vehicle also has flow-through ventilation, days like these, the sun may adequately
inclement weather. Press to direct warmed
described later in this section, to bring
warm your upper body, but your lower
air to the windshield and through the
outside air into your vehicle.
body may not be warm enough.
heater ducts.
If you have the optional engine coolant
DEF (Defrost): Press to direct most
heater and use it during cold weather,0°F
warmed air to the windshield and side
(- 18“C) or lower, your heating system
window vents.
will more quickly provide heat because
the engine coolantis already warmed. See
“Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index.
3f
I
~
~
I21
e
...
Comfort Controls & Audio Systems
To maintain a comfortable temperaturein
he rear area without making the front
Iassengers uncomfortable, adjust the front
a n speed first, then adjust the
emperature setting.
To turn off the rear fan, slide the control
o “OFF”.
Heater and Ventilation Rear Fan
System (CONK)
The control for the rear fan is located
If your vehicle is equipped with seats in
the third row, you willhave a rear air
outlet and a rear fan. To maximize air
flow to the rear ofyour vehicle, place the
left second row bucket seat in the forward
position (see “Adjusting Rear Seats” in
the Index). This uncovers the rear air
outlet.
Also keep the area around the base of the
center instrument panel console and the
area between and under the front seats
free of objects that could obstruct air flow
to therear.
. .. ILL
below the audio system.
First, select “LOWER’, “BI-LEV” or
“MIX” to direct air flow to the rear air
outlet and to the rear side windows. Use
the temperature control lever to adjust th
temperature setting. Then, select the forc
of air you want, from “LO” to “HI”, by
sliding the rear fan control to the desired
setting.
OFF: Press to turn the system off. Press
any climate control setting to turn the
system on.
8 : Slide the leverto the right to
increase fan speed, to the left to decrease
fan speed.
Temperature Control Lever: Slide the
lever to the right for warmer, heated air;
slide it to the left for cooled air.
Air Conditioner
When the temperature outside is above
(OPTION)
freezing, the air conditioner compressor
will automatically condition the air when
Your vehicle’s heater and air conditioner
you press “RECIRC” (the“A/C” indicator
work best if you keep your windows
light will glow), “MIX” or “DEF”(the
closed. Your vehicle also has
“A/,,’ indicator light will not glow).
flow-through ventilation, described later
in this section, to bring outside airinto
Press “A/C” (the “A/C” indicator light
your vehicle.
will glow) to condition the air when you
press “UPPER’, “BI-LEV” or
If you have the optional engine coolant
“LOWER”. To turn off the air conditioner
heater and use it during cold weather,0°F
compressor in these settings, press “A/C7’
(- 18O C>or lower, your heating system
again (the indicator light will go off‘).
will more quickly provide heat because
the engine coolant is already warmed. See
“Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index.
Each time you turn on the ignition, the air
conditioner will default to the setting you
had selected before last turning off the
ignition.
When the air conditioner compressor is
on, you may sometimes notice slight
changes in your vehicle’s engine
performance and power. This is normal,
because the system is designed to help
fuel economy while it maintains the
desired cooling level.
The air conditioner removes moisture
from the air, so you may sometimes
notice water dripping from under your
vehicle when it is idling or after it has
been turned off. This is normal.
On very hot days, your vehicle will .cool
down more quickly and economically if
you open the windows long enough to let
hot inside air escape. For all settings,
adjust the temperature control lever and
fan speed as desired.
123
...
Comfort Controls & Audio Systems
Directional Controls
The “BI-LEV” setting directs outside air
.nto your vehicle in two ways. Cooler air
RECIRC (Recirculate): Press to get
1s directed toward your upper body
maximum cooling or quick cool-down on :hrough the front instrument panel outlets,
very hot days. This setting recirculates
while warmed air is directed through the
much of the air inside your vehicle. It
heater ducts at your feet. At times this
should not be used for long periods of
temperature difference may be more
time because the air may become too cold apparent than others. For best results,
and dry.
slide the temperature control lever to the
it for
Slide the temperature control lever down middle position, and then adjust
comfort.
to the coolest setting and adjust the fan
speed as desired.
LOWER: This setting brings in most
heated
air through the heater ducts, and
UPPER: For normal cooling on hot days,
some through the defroster vents.
press “A/C” along with “UPPER”. This
setting cools outside air and directs it
MIX: Because of your Trans Sport’s
through the instrument panel outlets.
larger windshield area, this mode is
Adjust the temperature of the air with the particularly useful during cold or
temperature control lever.
inclement weather. Press to direct warmed
lir to the windshield and through the
BI-LEV (Bi-Level): This setting is
designed for use on sunny days when the heater ducts.
air is only moderately warm or cool. On
days like these, the sun may adequately
warm your upper body, but your lower
body may not be warm enough.
..
124
DEF (Defrost): Press to direct most
warmed air to the windshield and side
window vents.
If your vehicle is equippedwith seats in
the third row, youwill have a rear air
outlet and a rear fan. To maximize air
flow to the rear of your vehicle, place the
left second row bucket seatin the forward
position (see “Adjusting Rear Seats” in
the Index). This uncovers the rear
air
outlet.
Also keep the area around the base of the
center instrument panel console and the
area between and under the front seats
free of objects that could obstructair flow
to the rear.
Comfort Controls & Audio Systems
Rear Climate Control
System (OPTION) (CONT.)
will be directed to the rear of the vehicle
:hrough the overhead andthird-row air
-0nditioning outlets. If you select “A/C”
in the “LOWER” mode, cooled air will be
Sirected through the rear floor vent unless
the temperature control lever is set
approximately 30% from the full cold
setting. Heated air will result with the
temperature control lever setting above
30% from the full cold setting. However,
temperature adjustment of the heated air
is not possible. Cooled air will return
when the temperature control lever setting
is returned to approximately 25% from
the full cold setting. (See “Rear Air
Vents” later in this section).
Rear Air Vents
Rear Fan-Master Control
To maximize air flow through the rear
heater outlet, place the left second row
bucket seat or the bench seat in the
forward position (see “Adjusting Rear
Seats” in the Index).
The master control for the rear fan is
located below the audio system.
To maintain a comfortable temperature in
the rear area, select the force of air you
want, from “LO” to “HI”, by sliding the
The vent forward of the rear heater outlet control to the desired setting.
If you do not select “A/,” in the
is the cold air return vent. Be sure to keel
“UPPER” or “BI-LEV” modes, air
To transfer control of the rear fan to the
it free of obstructions.
directed to the rear of the vehicle will be
rear control switch, slide the master
cabin temperature.
Also keep the area around the baseof the control to “REAR”. The rear control
switch will not operate when the master
center instrument panel console and the
Select “LOWER’, “MIX” or “DEF’ when
control is in any other position.
area between and underthe front seats
outside temperatures are cool. In these
free of objects that could obstruct air f l o ~
modes, heated air will be directed to the
To turn off the rear fan, slide the master
to the rear.
rear of the vehicle through the rear side
control to “OFF’.
window vents and the rearfloor heater
vent.
... 126
Rear Fan-Rear Control
Defogging and Defrosting
This feature allows passengers riding in
the rear seatsto control the flowof air to
the rear areaof the vehicle.
To rapidly defrost the windshield, slide
the temperature control lever all the way
to “WARM” and press “DEF”.
The rear control switch is locatedon the
armrest next to the second row seat, left
position. The rear fan master control on
the instrument panel must bein the
“REAR” position for the rear control
switch to operate.
Adjust the fan to the highest speed.
To keep the windshield clear and bring in
heated air through the heater ducts, press
Your vehicle is equipped with side
window defogger vents located on the top.
of the instrument panel. For additional
side window defogging, press the
“BI-LEV” button and adjust the fan to the
highest speed. Aim the side vents on the
instrument panel toward the side
windows. For increased air flow to the
side vents, close the center vents.
“~1x97.
When the temperature outside is above
freezing, the air conditioner compressor
Select the forceof air you want, from
“LO” to “HI”, by turning the switch to the will run in these settings to help remove
moisture from the air.
desired setting.To turn the rear fanoff,
turn the switch to “OFF”. The rear fan can
also be turned off at the mastercontrol.
127..
.
Comfort Controls & Audio Systems
Do not attach a temporary vehicle licenst
icross the defogger grid on the rear
window.
NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or
something else sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming
grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty.
Rear Window Defogger
(OPTION)
Press “R. DEF” (Rear Defog) to warm the
defogger grid on the rear window. The
indicator light will glow while the rear
window defogger is operating. The rear
window defogger will turn off
automatically after about 10 minutes of
use. If you turn it on again, the defogger
will operate for about five minutes only.
You can also turn the defoggeroff by
turning off the ignition or pressing the
switch again.
... 128
=/ow=Through Ventilation
system
lour vehicle’s flow-through ventilation
ystem supplies outside air into the
rehicle when it is moving. Outside air
vi11 also enter the vehiclewhen the heater
)r the air conditioning fan is running.
Hearing damage from loud noise is
almost undetectable until it is too late.
Your hearing 'can adapt to higher volumes
of sound. Sound that seems normal can be
loud and harmful to your hearing. Take
precautions by adjusting the volume
control on your radio to a safe sound level
before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
Adjust the volume control to the
lowest setting.
Ventilation Tips:
0
Keep the hood and front air inlet free
of ice, snow, or any other obstruction
(such as leaves).The heater and
ddffoster will work far better, reducing
the chance of foggingthe inside of
your windows.
Increase volume slowly until you hear
comfortably and clearly.
129...
Comfort Controls & Audio Systems
w Audio Systems
(CONT)
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound
equipment to your vehicle -- like a
tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio -- be
sure’you can add what you want.If
you can, it’s very important to do it
properly. Added sound equipment
may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, Delco@radio
or other systems, and even damage
them. And, your vehicle’s systems
may interfere with the operation of
sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment,
check with your dealer and be sure
to check Federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units.
... 130
Setting the CIock
For radios with 4 “SEEK’ b:
1. With the radio on or off, press “SET”.
The “SET” indicator will appear on
1. With the radio on or off, press “SET”.
the digital display for five seconds.
The “SET” indicator will appear on
You must begin to set the clock to the
the digital display for five seconds.
correct hour and minute during those
five seconds.
You must begin to set the clock to the
correct hour and minute during those
2. Press and hold 4 “SEEK” until the
five seconds.
correct hour appearson the display.
2. Press and hold v “SEEK” until the
3. Press and hold “SEEK’ b until the
correct hour appears on the display.
correct minute appears on the display.
3. Press and hold “SEEK”A until the
correct minute appears on the display.
For radios with v “SEEK’A :
BAL (Balance): The control ring behind
the upper knob adjusts the lefthight
speaker balance.
Lower Knob (TUNE): This knob does
two things:
0
Turn it to tune in radio stations.
0
Press it to change between the AM
and FM bands (the digital screen will
momentarily display AM or FM, and
indicate if the radio is in stereo).
FADE: The control ring behind the lower
AM/FM Stereo Radio
The digital display indicates information
on time or radio station frequency, the
AM or FM radio band, whether the
station is in stereo, and other radio
functions.
Upper Knob (PWRoVOL): This knob
does four things:
0
Turn it to turn the system on and off
(your ignition must be on).
knob adjusts the front/rear speaker
balance.
!....
.'
Turn it to control the volume.
When the radio is on, press it to recall
the station frequency to the digital
display screen.
0
When the ignition is off, press it to
display the clock.
131
...
Comfort Controls & Audio Systems
AM/FM Stereo Radio
(C0;NT.)
SEEK A : Press to seek and stop on the
next station higher or lower on the radio
band.
rREB (Treble): Slide this lever up to
ncrease treble, or down to decrease it. If
I station is weak or noisy, reduce the
reble.
BASS: Slide this lever up to increase
,ass, or down to decrease it.
J p to three additional stations on each
)and may be preset by “pairing”
Jushbuttons:
1. Tune in the desired station.
You can also use the “SEEK” buttons to
scan radio stations up or down the AM or
FM bands.
I‘o Preset Radio Stations:
2. Press “SET”, and within five seconds
press any two adjacent pushbuttons at
the same time.
I . Tune in the desired station.
3. The station canbe tuned in when the
To scan stations up the band, press and
hold “SEEK”A , thenpress
“SEEK”,
then release both buttons. The radio will
go to the next station and pause there for
a few seconds. It will continue to scan
until you press either “SEEK” button.
2. Press “SET”. The word “SET” will
appear on the digital screen for five
seconds.
3. While “SET” is displayed, press one
of the four pushbuttons.
To scan stations down the band, press and 4. Repeat steps 1-3 for each of four AM
and four FM stations.
hold “SEEK”, thenpress “SEEK’A ,
then release both buttons. The radio will
go to the next station and pause there for
a few seconds. It will continue to scan
until you press either “SEEK” button.
..
132
same two pushbuttons are pressed at
the same time.
BAL (Balance): The control ring behind
the upper knob adjusts the left/right
speaker balance.
Lower Knob (TUNE): This knob does
two things:
Turn it to tune in radio stations.
0
Press it to change between the AM
and FM bands (the digital screen will
momentarily display AM or FM, and
indicate if the radio is in stereo).
FADE: The control ring behind the lower
knob adjusts the front/rear speaker
balance.
AMIFM Stereo with
Cassette Player
Upper Knob (VOL): This knob does
four things:
Turn it to turn the system on and off
(your ignition must be on).
The digital display indicates information
on time or radio station frequency, the
AM or FM radio band, whether the
station is in stereo, and other radio
functions.
Turn it to control the volume.
When the radio is on, press it to recall
the station frequency to the digital
display screen.
0
When a tape is playing, press it to hear
the other side of the tape.
133...
Comfort Controls & Audio Systems
AM/FM Stereo with
Cassette Player(CONK)
TREBLE: Slide this lever up to increase
treble, or down to decrease it. If a station
is weak or noisy, reduce the treble.
To scan stations up the band, pressand
“SEEK”,
1old “SEEK’A ,thenpress
:hen release both buttons. The radio will
go to the next station and pause there for
few seconds. It will continue to scan
until you press either “SEEK” button.
To scan stations down the band, press and
hold v “SEEK”, then press “SEEK’A ,
then release both buttons. The radio will
v SEEK A : Press to seek and stop on the go to the next station and pause there for
next station higher or lower on the radio
a few seconds. It will continue to scan
band.
until you press either “SEEK” button.
You can also use the “SEEK’ buttons to
scan radio stations up or down the AM or
FM bands.
BASS: Slide this lever up to increase
bass, or down to decrease it.
.*
134
I’o Preset Radio Stations:
Up to three additional stations on each
band may be preset by “pairing”
pushbuttons:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press “SET”, and within five seconds
press any two adjacent pushbuttons at
the same time.
3. The station can be tuned in when the
same two pushbuttons. are pressed at
the same time.
Fast Forward: Press the button with the
arrow pointing in the same direction that
the tape is playing. To stop fast forward,
lightly press the “STOP-EJECT” button.
Reverse: Press the button with the arrow
pointing in the opposite direction that the
tape is playing. To stop reverse, lightly
press the “STOP-EJECT” button.
STOP-EJECT To stop playing a tape,
To Play a Cassette Tape:
With the power switch on,insert.a tape
into the cassette door.Do not use tapes
that are longer than 45 minutes on each
side.
When the right indicator arrow is lit,
selections listed on the bottomside of the
cassette are playing. When the left arrow
is lit, selections listed on the top side of
the cassette are playing. To change sides
of the tape while thecassette is playing,
press the upper knob. When theend of a
tape is reached, the other side will then
Play-
fully press this button (the cassette will be
partially ejected, and the radio will begin
playing).
135...
Comfort Controls & Audio Systems
Lower Knob (TUNE): This knob does
two things:
AIWIFM Stereo with
Cassette Playerand
Graphic Equalizer
The digital display indicates information
on time or radio station frequency, the
AM or FM radio band, whether the
station is in stereo, and other radio
functions.
PWR (Power): Press to turn the unit on
and off when the ignition is on.
0
Turn it slightly to the leftor right to
tune in radio stations. If you hold it to
the left or right, it will tune rapidly.
You can also turn it one stop at a time
to fine-tune a specific frequency.
0
Press to change between the AM,
FMl or FM2 bands. (FMl allows you
to preset five stations, FM2 allows
you to preset anotherfive stations.)
The band you select will momentarily
appear on the digital display, and
indicate if the radio is in stereo.
Upper Knob (VOL): This knob doestwc
Your radio has an AMAX-certified
things:
receiver. It can produce quality AM stereo
0 Turn it slightly to the left or right to
sound and receiveC-Quam’ stereo
control the volume.
broadcasts. AMAX reduces noise without
reducing the high frequencies you need
0 Press it to mute the radio or tape
for the best sound.You don’t have todo
player. Press again to listen.
anything to your Delco/GM radio because
BAL (Balance): The control ring behind AMAX is automatic.
the upper knob adjusts the left/right
FADE: The control ring behind the lower
speaker balance.
knob adjusts the front/rear speaker
balance.
4 SEEK b:Press “SEEK” b to seek and
stop on the next station higher
on the
radio band. Press4 “SEEK” to seek and
stop on the next station lower on the
band.
RCL (Recall): Press to alternate the
display between the time and theselected
station and radio band.
EQUALIZER: Boost the bass,
emphasize a voice in a song, brighten the
treble -your equalizer gives you freedom
to adjust five separate frequencies of
sound to your individual taste. Move a
lever. upto emphasize a frequency, move
it down to de-emphasize. It’s best to
begin with the levers in the middle
position, then adjust each lever as you
like.
To. Preset Radio Stations:
1..Tune the digital display to the station
you want.
2. Press’“SET”. The “SET” indicator
will appear on the digital screen for
five seconds.
3. While the “SET” indicator is
displayed, press one of the five
pushbuttons.
The five pushbuttons under the cassette
entry door can be used topreset up to 15 4. Repeat steps 1-3 for each of five AM
and five FM stations.
radio stations (five AM, five FM1 and
five FM2). The buttons have other uses
5. Press the lower knob until FM2
when you are playing a tape (see “TOPlay
appears on the digital display. You can
a Cassette Tape” later in this section).
then follow steps 1-3 for fivemore
,, I. .
FM stations.
%.’
’,
r l i
&.b
,.
.-A.
I,
I..:
Comfort Controls& Audio Systems
This system has automatic Dolby B NR’
to reduce background noise on Dolby
encoded tapes. Dolby@Noise Reduction
is manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby@and the symbol 00 are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
AMIFM Stereo with
Cassette Player and
Graphic Equalizer(CONT.)
To Play a Cassette Tape:
Press “PWR” to turn the radio on. The
radio will play until a cassette is pushed
into the cassette entry door (the tape side
goes in first). Do not use tapes that are
longer than 90 minutes (45 minutes on
each side).
.. 138
PROG (Program): Press to change the
side of tape being played. When the end
of a tape is reached, the other side will
then play.
Cr02: This button sets tape bias. When
playing high bias chrome or metal tapes,
press the button to turn the Cr02 display
on. When playing standard tapes, press
again to turn the display off.
REV (Reverse): Press to reverse the tape
rapidly; press again to play the tape. (The
radio plays while a tape is rewinding.)
FWD (Fast Forward): Press to advance
[he tape rapidly; press again to play. (The
radio plays while the tape is advancing.)
PREV (Previous): Press “PREV” to
repeat a passage. The tapewill back up
and stop at the first four-second quiet spot
in the tape, or when you press “PREV”
sgain or “PROG”.
NEXT Press to go to the next selection
on the tape. The tape will stop at the first
four-second quiet spot in the tape, or
when you press “NEXT” again or
”PROG”.
SToPL (StopoPlay): Press to switch from
the tape to the radio. Press againto
resume playing the tape.
EJECT Press to eject the cassette tape
(the radio will then play).
Lower Knob (TUNE): This knob does
two things:
0
AM/FM Stereo with
Compact Disc Player and
Graphic Equalizer
The digital display indicates information
on time or radio station frequency,the,
AM or FM radio band, whether the
station is in stereo, and other radio
functions.
PWR (Power): Turns the unit on and
off when the ignition is on.
Turn it slightly to the left or right to
tune in radio stations. If you hold it to
the left or right, it will tune rapidly.
You can also turn it one stop at a time
to fine-tune a specific frequency.
Press to change between the AM,
FM1 or FM2 bands. (FMl allows you
to preset five stations, FM2 allows
you to preset another five stations.)
The digital screen will momentarily
display AM, FMl or FM2, and
indicate if the radio is in stereo.
Upper Knob (VOL): This knob does two
Your radio has an AMAX-certified
things:
receiver. It can produce quality AM stereo
0 Turn it slightly to the left or right to
sound and receive C-Quam@ stereo
control the volume.
broadcasts. AMAX reduces noise without
reducing the high frequencies you need
Press it to mute the radio or compact
for the best sound. You don’t have to do
disc player. Press again to listen.
anything to your Delco/GM radio because
BAL (Balance): The control ring behind AMAX is automatic.
the upper knob adjusts the left/right
speaker balance.
139...
Comfort Controls& Audio Systems
3. While the “SET” indicator is displayed,
AM/FM Stereo with
Compact Disc Playerand
Graphic Equalizer(CONT.)
press one of the five pushbuttons.
4. Repeat steps 1-3 for each of five AM
and five FM stations.
FADE: The control ring behind the lower
knob adjusts the front/rear speaker
balance.
5. Press the lower knob until FM2
appears on the digital display.You can
then follow steps 1-3 for five more
FM stations.
4 SEEK b: Press to seek and stop on the
next station higher or lower on the radio
band.
RCL (Recall): Press to alternate the
display between the time and the selected
station and radio band.
EQUALIZER: Boost the bass,
emphasize avoice in a song, brighten the
treble - your equalizer gives you
freedom to adjust five separate
frequencies of sound to your individual
taste. Move a lever up to emphasize a
frequency, move it down to
de-emphasize. It’s best to begin with the
levers in the middle position, then adjust
each lever as you like.
... 140
To Play a Compact Disc:
The five numbered pushbuttons can be
lsed to preset up to 15 radio stations
five AM, five-FM1and five FM2).
The buttons have other uses when you are
)laying a compact disc (see “TOPlay a
Zompact Disc” later in this section).
ro Preset Radio Stations:
1. Tune the digital display to thestation
you want.
2. Press “SET”. The “SET” indicator
will appear on the digital screen for
five seconds.
Many of the controls for the radio
also
have functions for the compactdisc
player, as explained here.
Don’t use mini-discs that are called
singles. They won’t eject. Use only
full-size compact discs.
1. Press “PWR” toturn the radio on.
2. Insert a disc part-way into the slot,
with the label side up. The player will
pull it in. In a few seconds, the disc
should play.
If the disc comes back out and/or“Err”
appears on the display:
The disc may be upside down.
The disc may be dirty, scratched or
wet.
There may be too much moisture in
the air (wait about one hour and try
again).
STePL (StopoPlay): Press to stop the
disc player; the radio will play.Press
again to play the disc (the player will start
REV (Reverse): Press and hold to rapidly playing the disc where it was stopped
back up to a favorite passage. Release to
earlier).
resume playing.
EJCT (Eject): Press to eject the disc; the
FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to radio will play.
rapidly advance the disc. Release to
resume playing.
CD Player Anti-Theft
RDM (Random): Press to play tracks in
random order.
PREV (Previous): Press to play a track
The player may be too hot, or the road again. If you keep pressing the “PREV”
may be too rough for the disc to play. button, the disc will keep backing up to
As soon as things get back to normal, previous’tracks.
the disc should play.
NEXT Press when you wantto hear the
While a disc is playing, the “CD”
next track. If you keep pressing the
indicator is displayed on the digital
“NEXT” button, the disc will keep
screen, as is the clock.
advancing to other tracks.
RCL (Recall): Press once to see what
When Finished with the Compact Disc
track is playing. Press again within five
Player:
seconds’tosee how long your selection
has.been playing. The track number also
If you press “PWR” or turn off the
will be displayed when the volume is
ignition, the disc will stay in the player
changed or a new track starts to play.
and start again when you turn on the
COMP (Compression): Depressing this ignition or power switch. The disc will
button makes soft and loud passages more begin playing at the point where it had
been stopped.
equal in volume. Press again to resume
normal play.
Feature
Delco-LOC II@is a security feature for
the compact disc player. It can be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays
normally. If it is used, your player won’t
be usable if it is ever stolen, because it
will go to “LOC” mode any time batFery
power is removed. Until an un “LOC”
code is entered, it will not turn on. .
The instructions below tell you how to
enter a secret code into the system. If your
vehicle loses battery power for any
reason, you must unlock the system with
the secret code before the radio will turn
on.
141
...
Comfort Controls & Audio Systems
CD Player Anti-Theft
Feature (CONI)
2.
3.
4.
button to make
the first number appear.
I’o Unlock the System Aftera Power
Loss:
7. Rotate the lower (“TUNE’) knob right When battery power is reapplied to a
secured radio, the radio won’tturn on and
or left to make the last two numbers
“LOC” will appear on the display. Enter
agree with your code.
Write down any six-digit number and
your
secret code as follows; pause no
keep it in a safe place.
B. Press the lower (“BAND’) knob and
more than 15 seconds between steps.
“000” will appear again. Now you are
Turn the ignition to the Accessory or
1. Turn the ignition on. (Radiooff.)
ready to enter the last three digits of
Run position.
your code.
2. Press the “SET” button. The display
Press the “PWR” button to turn the
will show “000”.
9.
Repeat
steps
6
and
7
for
the
last
three
radio off.
digits of your code.
3. Enter the six digits of the code
Press the “1” and “4” buttons together.
following steps 6-9 above. The
1O.Press
the
lower
(“BAND’)
knob
and
Hold them down until “- - -” shows
display will show the numbers as
“REP” will appear for five seconds
on the display (at least five seconds).
entered.
and
then
“000”
will
appear.
You are ready to enter your secret
code.
11.Repeat steps 6 through 10. This time 4. Press the lower (“BAND’) knob and
the time appears, indicating that the
“SEC” will appear, indicating that the
NOTE: If you allow more than 15
disabling sequence was successful.If
radio is secure.
seconds to elapse between any steps,
the display indicates “SEC”, the
the radio automatically reverts to time
numbers did not match and the unit is
and you must start the procedure over
still secured.
at step 4.
To Set the Anti-Theft System:
1.
E. Press the “SEEK”
5. Press “SET” and “OOO” will appear on
the display.
... 142
Disabling the Anti-Theft System:
4. Press the lower (“BAND”) knob. The
radio will display “000”
1. Press the “1” and “4” buttons together
for five seconds with ignition on and 5. Enter the second three digits of the
radio power off. The display will
code. The display will show the
show “SEC”, indicating theunit is in
numbers as entered.
the secure mode. (If“- - -” appears on
the display, the anti-theft system has 6. Press the lower (“BAND”) knob. If
the display shows “- - -” then the
already been disabled.)
time, the disabling sequence was
successful (the numbers matched the
2. Press the “SET” button. The display
will show “000”.
user-selected code or the factory
back-up code) and the unit is in the
3. Enter the first three digits of the code
“UNSECURED” mode. If the display Steering Wheel Touch
following steps6 and 7 of the
shows “SEC”, the disabling sequence
Controls (OPTION)
preceding paragraphs. The display
was unsuccessful and the numbers did
will show the numbers as entered.
not match either of the codes and the
Some audio system functions can be
unit will remain in the “SECURED”
operated with these controls.
mode.
AM/FM: Press to select either the AM or
FMl and FM2 radio bands. The band you
select will be displayed on the digital
screen. The frequency of the station will
be displayed, and if the station is in
stereo, the stereo indicator will also be
displayed.
143..
.
Comfort Controls & Audio Systems
Steering Wheel Touch
COntrOlS (OPTION) (CONI)
Understanding Radio
Reception
SEEK: Each time you press an up or
down arrow on “SEEK”, you will tune in
the next station up or down the AM or
FM radio band.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound,
but FM signals will reach only about 10
to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings
or hills can interferewith FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
When listening to a cassette tape or
compact disc, you can change to the
previous or next selection by pressing the
“SEEK” up or down arrow.
RCL (Recall): When the radio is on,
press to change between the clock and the
radio station frequency displayed on the
digital screen.
AM
The range for mostAM stations is greater
than for FM, especially at night.The
longer range, however, can cause stations
VOL (Volume): Press A to increase
to interfere with each other. AM can also
volume. Press to lowerthevolume.
pick up noise from things like storms and
PWR: Turns the unit on and off when the power lines. To lower this noise, try
reducing the treble level.
ignition is on.
PRE-SET Press this to hear the radio
stations that are set on your system.
AM Stereo
Your Delco@system may be able to
receive C-Quam@stereo broadcasts.
Many AM stations around the country use
C-Quam@to produce stereo, though
some do not. C-Quam@is a registered
trademark of Motorola, Inc. If your
Delco@system can get C-Quam@signals,
your stereo indicator light will come on
when you are receiving it.
..
144
Care of Your Cassette
Tape Player
You may also choose a non-scrubbing
action, wet-type cleaner which uses a
cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly head. This type of cleaning cassette will
not eject. It may not clean as thoroughly
can cause reduced sound quality, ruined
as the scrubbing type cleaner.
cassettes, or a damaged mechanism.
Cassette tapes should be stored in their
Cassettes are subject to wear and the
cases away from contaminants, direct
sound quality and may degrade over time.
sunlight, and extreme heat. if they aren’t,
Always make sure that the cassette tape is
they may not operate properly or cause
in good condition before you have your
failure of the tape player.
tape player serviced.
Your tape player should be cleaned after
Care of Your Compact
every 50 hours or use. If you notice a
reduction in sound quality, try a known
Discs
good cassette to see if the tape or the tape
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their
player is at fault. Ifthis other cassette has
original cases or other protective cases
no improvement in sound quality, clean
and away from direct sunlight and dust. If
the tape player.
the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
action non-abrasive cleaning cassette. This
detergent solution and clean it, wiping
system uses a cleaning cassette with pads
from the center to the edge.
which scrub the tape headas the hubs of
Be sure never to touch the signal surface
the cleaner cassette turn.It is normal for
when
handling discs. Pick up discs by
the cartridge to eject while cleaning.
Insert
grasping the outer edges or the edgeof
the cassette at least 3 times to ensure
the
hole and the outer edge.
thorough cleaning.A scrubbing action
cleaning cassette is available through your
Chevrolet dealership.
145..
.
Comfort Controls & Audio Systems
NOTICE:
Don’t mount anything to your roof,
such as an antenna or a luggage
carrier, or to your headliner. If you
puncture the roof or headliner, you
could damage or destroy your
integrated roof antenna. Have any
work of this type done by your
dealer.
Integrated Roof Antenna
Your state-of-the-art integrated roof
antenna is not visible. It is located
between the roof and headliner of your
vehicle, covering the entire roof area frorr
the rear edge of the front doors to the
liftgate.
’ you want to add a mobile phone or
No-way radio to your vehicle, there are
3ecial precautions you’ll need to take.
ee “Adding Sound Equipment” in the
Idex.
Part 4
Your Driving and the Road
H e r e YOU’IIfind information about
driving on different kinds of roads
and
in varying weather conditions. We’ve
also included many other useful
tips
on driving.
I
DefensiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
148
DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..151
Anti-LockBrakes (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
TractionControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153
SteeringTips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
Steering in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
155
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
DrivingatNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
Driving in the Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
CityDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
161
FreewayDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
164
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
165
TowingaTrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
168
147
...
Your Driving and the Road
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about
driving is: Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety
device in your Pontiac: Buckle up. (See
“Safety Belts” in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or freeways, it means “always expect the
unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers
are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do.
Be ready for their mistakes.
w Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking
and driving is a national tragedy. It’s the
number one contributor to the highway
death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year. Alcohol takes away three
things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
The Blood Alcohol Content(BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon
four things:
How much alcohol is in the drink.
Vision
Police records show that almost half of all
motor vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol - a driver, a passenger or
someone else, such as a pedestrian, had
Rear-end collisions are about the most
been drinking. In most cases, these deaths
preventable of accidents. Yet they are
are the result of someone who was
common. Allow enough following
drinking and driving. About 20,000 motor
distance. It’s the best defensive driving
vehicle-related deaths occur each year
maneuver, in both city and rural driving.
You never know when the vehicle in front because of alcohol, and thousands of
of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. people are injured.
... 148
lust how much alcohol is too much if a
person plans to drive? Ideally, no one
should drink alcohol and then drive.But
if one does, then what’s “too much”?It
can be a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and
situation, here issome general
information on the problem.
The drinker’s body weight.
The amount of food that is consumed
before and during drinking.
0
The length of time it has taken the
drinker to consume the alcohol.
HOURS
HOURS
According to the American Medical
Association, a 180-pound (82 kg) person
who drinks three 12-ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with
a BAC of about0.06 percent. The person
would reach the same BAC by drinking
three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses of wineor
three mixed drinksif each had 1- 1/2
ounces (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey,
gin or vodka.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts.For
example, if the same person drankthree
double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of
liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A
person who consumes foodjust before or
during drinking will have a slightlylower
BAC level.
NUMBER
OF DRINKS
(as in picture)
1 HOUR
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
BODY WEIGHT IN POUNDS
T‘he law in most U.S. states sets the legal alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly
limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In Canada the person drinks them.
ttle limit is 0.08 percent, and in some
But it’s very important to keep in mind
01ther countries it’s lower than that. The
I3#ACwill be over 0.10 percent after three that the ability to drive is affected well
below a BAC of0.10 percent. Research
tc) six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as
shows that the driving skills of many
wre’ve seen, it depends on how much
people are impaired at a BAC
149...
Your Driving and the Road
Drunken Driving (CONT.)
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the
effects are worse at night. All drivers are
impaired at BAC levels above 0.05
percent. Statistics show that the chance of
being in an accident increases sharply for
drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent
or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent (three beers in one hour for a
180-pound or 82 kg person) has doubled
his or her chance of having an accident.
At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the
chance of that driver having an accident is
six times greater; at a level of 0.15
percent, the chances are twenty-five times
greater! And, the body takes about an
hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one
drink. No amount of coffee or number of
cold showers will speed that up.
“I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer.
What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts
into the street? A person with a higher
BAC might not be able to react quickly
enough to avoid the collision.
... 150
rhere’s something else about drinking
tnd driving that many people don’t know.
Medical research shows that alcohol in B
Yerson’s system can make crash injuries
worse. That’s especially true for brain,
spinal cord and heart injuries. That means
:hat if anyone who has been drinking -jriver or passenger -- is in a crash, the
:hance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if that person had
not been drinking. And we’ve already
seen that the chance of a crash itself is
higher for drinking drivers.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your
vehicle go where you want it to go. They
are the brakes, the steering and the
accelerator. All three systems have todo
their work at the places where the tires
meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you’re drivingon
snow or ice, it’s easy to ask moreof those
control systems than the tires and road
can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time
and reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the
brake pedal. That’s perception time.Then
you have to bring up your foot and do it.
That’s reaction time.
Average reaction timeis about 3/4 of a
second. But that’s only anaverage. It
might be less with one driver and as
long
as two or three secondsor more with
another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and eyesight all
play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 314 of a second, a
vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h)
travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot
of distance in an emergency, so keeping
enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances
vary greatly with the surface of the road
(whether it’s pavement orgravel); the
condition of the road (wet, dry, icy);tire
tread; and the condition of your brakes.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some
people drive in spurts -- heavy acceleration
fallowed by heavy braking -- rather than
keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake.
Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear
out much faster if you do a lot of heavy
braking. If you keep pace with the traffic
and allow realistic following distances, you
will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That .means better braking and longer
brake life.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
If your engine ever stops while you’re
driving, brake normally but don’t pump
Your Pontiac has an advanced electmnic
your brakes. If you do,.the pedal may get braking system that will help prevent
harder to push down. If your engine stops, skidding.
you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake.
Once the power assist is used up, it may
take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
C
Your Driving andthe Road
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the
road is wet. You’re driving safely.
(CONT)
Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of
When you start your vehicle, or when you you.
begin to drive away, you may hear a
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what
momentary motor or clicking noise. And happens with ABS.
you may even notice that your brake
pedal moves a little while this is going on. A computer senses that wheels are
slowing down. If one of the wheels is
This is the ABS system testing itself.
about
to stop rolling, the computer will
(You may also hear a clicking noise if you
separately work the brakes at each front
leave the ignition in the “Run” position
for about four seconds before starting the wheel and at the rear wheels.
vehicle.) If there’s a problem with the
The anti-lock system can change the
anti-lock brake system, the anti-lock
brake pressure Faster than any driver
brake system warning light will stay on or
could. The computer is programmed to
flash.
make the most of available tire and road
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
See “Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
. 152
conditions.
You can steer around the obstacle while
braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and
controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the
time you need to get your foot up to the
brake pedal. If you get too close to the
vehicle i n front of you, you won’t have
time to apply your brakesif that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Your Driving andthe Road
To turn the system off, press the button.
The light on the button will go off. If the
raction control system is limiting wheel
;pin when you press the button, the
;ystem won’t turn off right away. It will
rYait until there’s no longer a current need
.o limit wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any
:ime by pressing the button again. The
ight on the button should come on.
Traction Control System
(Option: 3800 V6 Engine)
(CONI)
The traction control system automatically
comes on whenever you start your
vehicle.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery
road conditions, you should always leave
the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever
need to. (You should turn the system off if
your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud,
ice or snow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
... 154
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
:t’s important to take curves ata
.easonable speed.
9lot of the “driver lost control” accidents
nentioned on the news happen on curves.
-Iere’s why:
Zxperienced driver or beginner, each of
1s is subject to the same laws
of physics
when
driving
on
curves.
The
traction
of
Braking in Emergencies
it
.he tires against the road surface makes
Use your anti-lock braking system when
Jossible for the vehicleto change its path,
you need to. With anti-lock, you can steer when you turn the front wheels.If there’s
md brake at the same time. In many
IO traction, inertia will keep the vehicle
emergencies, steering can help you more going in the same direction.If you’ve
than even the very best braking.
ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you’ll understand this.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because
the engine stops or the system is not
functioning, you can steer but it will take
much more effort.
The traction you can getin a curve
depends on the condition of your tires and
the road surface, the angle at which the
curve is banked, and your speed. While
you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor
you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp
curve. Then you suddenly accelerate.
Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work
where the tires meet the road. Unless you
have traction control and the systemis on,
adding the sudden acceleration can
demand too much of those places.You
can lose control.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that
you should adjust your speed. Of course,
the posted speeds are based on good
weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll .want to go
slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you
approach a curve, do it before you enter
the curve, while your front wheels are
What should youdo if this ever happens? straight ahead.
Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the
Try to adjust your speed so you can.
vehicle the way you want it to go, and
“drive” through the curve. Maintain a
slow down.
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve,
and then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be
more effective than braking. For example,
you come over a hill and find a truc,k
stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly
pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts
out from between parked cars and stops
right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking -- if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t
room. That’s the time for evasive action
-- steering around the problem.
155...
Your Driving and the Road
Steering in Emergencies
Passing
(CONT.)
The driver of a vehicle about to pass
another on a two-lane highway waitsfor
just the right moment, accelerates, moves
around the vehicle ahead, then goes back
into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
Your Pontiac can perform very well in
emergencies like these, First apply your
brakes. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem,
to the left or right depending on the space
available.
An emergency like this requires close
attention and a quick decision. If you are
holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions,
you can turn it a full 180 degrees very
quickly without removing either hand.
But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations
are always possible is a good reason to
practice defensive driving at all times and
wear safety belts properly.
... 156
Off-Road Recovery
You may find sometime that your right
wheels have dropped off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while you’re
driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightl:
below the pavement, recovery should be
fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and
then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering
wheel up to 1/4 turn until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your steering wheel to go straight
down the roadway.
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle
on a two-lane highway is a potentially
dangerous move, since the passing
vehicle occupies the same lane as
oncoming traffic for several seconds.A
miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a
brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driverface to
face with the worst of all traffic accidents
-- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
0
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road,
to the sides, and to crossroads for
situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any
doubt whatsoever about makinga
successful pass, wait fora better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement
markings, and lines. If you cansee a
sign up ahead that might indicatea
turn or an intersection, delay your
pass. A broken center line usually
indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road aheadis clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side
of the lane ora double solid line,even
if the road seems emptyof
approaching traffic.
Do not gettoo close to thevehcle you
want to pass while you’re awaiting an
opportunity. For one thing, following
too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you’re following a
larger vehicle. Also, you won’thave
adequate spaceif the vehicle ahead
suddenly slows or stops. Keepback a
reasonable distance.
0
When it looks like a chance to pass is
coming up, start to accelerate butstay
in the right lane anddon’t get too
close. Time your moveso you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to
move into the other lane.If the way is
clear to pass, you will havea “running
start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to
cause you to cancel your pass, you
need only slow down and drop back
again and wait for another opportunity.
If other cars are lined up to pass a
slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take
care that someone isn’t trying to pass
you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over
your shoulder and check the blind
spot.
Check your mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your left lane
change signal before moving out of
the right lane to pass. When you are
far enough ahead of the passed vehicle
to see its front in your inside mirror,
activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane.
(Remember that your right outside
mirror is convex. The vehicle you just
passed may seem to be farther away
from you than it really is.)
0
Try not to pass more than one vehicle
at a time on two-lane roads.
Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.
0
Don’t overtake a slowly moving
vehicle,too rapidly. Even though the
brake lights are not flashing, it may be
slowing down or starting to turn.
0
If you’re being passed, make it easy
for the following driver to get ahead
of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to
the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say
about what happens when the three‘
control systems (brakes, steering and
acceleratiori) don’t have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to dowhat
the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep
trying to steer and constantly seek an
escape route or area of less danger.
157...
Your Driving and the Road
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the
vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most
skids by taking reasonable care suited to
existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids
are always possible.
If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be
ready for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water,
snow, ice, gravel, or other material is on
the road. For safety, you’ll want to slow
down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down
The three types of skids correspond.to
on slippery surfaces because stopping
your Pontiac’s three control systems.In the distance will be longer and vehicle
braking skid your wheels aren’trolling. In control more limited.
the steering or cornering slud,too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires
to While driving on a surface with reduced
slip and lose cornering force. And in the traction, try your best to avoid sudden
acceleration skid too much throttle causes steering, acceleration, or braking
(including engine braking.by shifting to a
the driving wheels to spin.
lower gear). Any sudden changes could
A cornering skid is best handled by
cause the tires to slide. You may not
easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. realize the surface is slippery until your
If you have the traction control system,
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize
remember: It helps avoid only the
warning clues -- such as enough water,
acceleration skid. If you do not have
ice or packed snow on the road to make a
traction control, or if the system is off,
“mirrored surface” -- and slow down
then an acceleration skid is also best
when you have any doubt.
handled by easing your foot off the
Remember: Any anti-lock braking system
accelerator pedal.
(ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your
foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly
steer the way you want the vehicle to go.
... 158
Driving at Night
\Tight driving is more dangerous than day
hiving. One reason is that some drivers
r e likely to be impaired -- by alcohol or
lrugs, with night vision problems, orby
atigue.
-€ereare some tips on night driving.
D
Drivedefensively.
D
Don’t drink and drive.
D
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to
reduce the glare from headlights
behind you.
’
0
Since you can’t see as well, you may
need to slow down and keep more
spacebetweenyouandothervehicles.
0
Slow down, especially on higher
speed roads. Your headlights canlight
up only so much road ahead.
0
In remote areas, watch for animals.
~
a If you’re tired, pull off the road in a
safe place and rest.
l
You can be temporarily blinded by
approaching lights. It can take a second or
two, or even several seconds, for your
eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are
faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a
vehicle with misaimed headlights), slow
down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching lights.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on
your vehicle clean -- inside and out.
Glare at night is made much worse by dirt
Night Vision
on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
No one can seeas well at night asin the
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty
daytime. But as we get older these
glass makes lights dazzle and flash more
differences increase. A 50-year-old driver than clean glass would, making the pupils
may require at least twice as muchlight to of your eyes contract repeatedly.
see the same thing at night asa
Remember that your headlights light up
20-year-old.
far less of a roadway when you are in a
What you do in the daytime canalso
turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving;
affect your night vision. For example, if that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
you spend the day in bright sunshine you lighted objects. Just as your headlights
are wise to wear sunglasses. Youreyes
should be checked regularly for proper
will have less trouble adjusting to night.
aim, so should your eyes be examined
But if you’re driving, don’t wear
regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
sunglasses at night. They may cut down
blindness -- the inability to see in dim
on glare from headlights, but theyalso
light -- and aren’t even aware of it.
make a lot of things invisible.
Driving in the Rain;
Rain and wet roads can mean drivfng
trouble. On a wet road you can’t stop,
accelerate or turn as well because your
tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires don’t ‘have
much tread left, you’ll get even less
traction. It’s always wise to go slower and
be cautious if rain starts to fall while you
are driving. The surface may get wet
suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for
driving on dry pavement.
159
...
Your Driving and the Road
Driving in the Rain
(CONE)
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to
see. Even if your windshield wiper blades
are in good shape, a heavy rain can make
it harder to seeroad signs and traffic
signals, pavement markings, the edge of
the road, and even people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment
in good shape and keep your windshield
washer tank filled. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show
signs of streaking or missing areas on the
windshield, or when strips of rubber start
to separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water
puddles or even going through some car
washes can cause problems, too. The
water may affect your brakes. Try to
avoid puddles. But if you can’t, try to
slow down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much
water can build up under yourtires that
they can actually ride on the water. This
can happen if the road is wetenough and
you’re going fast enough. When your
vehicle is hydroplaning,it has little or no
contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it
can if your tires haven’t much treador if
the pressure in one or more is low. It can
happen if a lot of water is standing on the
road. If you can see reflections from trees,
telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’ssurface,
there could be hydroplaning.
.. I60
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher
speeds. Therejust isn’t a hard and fast
rule about hydroplaning.The best advice
is to slow down when itis raining.
Try to use the freeways that rim and
crisscross most large cities. You’ll
save time and energy. (See the next
section, “Freeway Driving.”)
Some Other Rahy
Weather Tips
Treat a green light as a warning signal.
A traffic light is there because the
corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and just
before you start to move, check both
ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be
running the red light.
0
Turn on your low-beam headlights -not just your parking lights-- to help
make you more visibleto others.
0
Besides slowing down, allow some
extra following distance. Andbe
especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more
clear room ahead, and be prepared to
have your view restricted by road
spray.
Have good tires with proper tread
depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.)
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city
streets is the amount of traffic on them.
You’ll want to watch out for what the
other drivers are doing and pay attention
to traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in
city driving:
0
Know the best way to get to where
you are going. Get a city map and pian
your trip into an unknown part of the
city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
161
...
Your Driving and the Road
1
At the entrance there is usually a ramp
that leads to the freeway. If you have a
clear view of the freeway as you drive
along the entrance ramp, you should
begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow.
Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn
signal, check your mirrors and glance
over your shoulder as often as necessary.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic
flow.
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways (also called
thruways, parkways, expressways,
turnpikes, or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their
own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway
driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep
to the right. Drive at the same speed most
of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast
or too-slow driving breaks a smooth
traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a
freeway as a passing lane.
... 162
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your
speed to the posted limit or to the
prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the
right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your
mirrors. Then use your turn signal.
When you want to leave the freeway,
nove to the proper lane well
in advance.
f you miss your exit do not, under any
ircumstances, stop and backup. Drive on
o the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes
pite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your
speedometer, not to your senseof motion.
4fter driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think youare
going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a
Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Tryto be well
Just before you leave the lane, glance
rested. If you must start when you’re not
quickly over your shoulder to make sure
fresh -- such as after a day’s work -there isn’t another vehicle in your “blind” don’t plan to make too many miles that
spot.
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable
clothing and shoes you can easily drive
Once you are moving on the freeway,
in.
make certain you allow a reasonable
following distance. Expect to move
Is your vehicle ready fora long trip? If
slightly slower at night.
you keep it serviced and maintained, it’s
ready to go. If it needs service, have it
done before starting out.Of course, you’ll
find experienced andable service experts
in Pontiac deaierships all across North
America. They’ll be ready and willing to
help if you needit.
Here are some things you can check
before a trip:
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the
reservoir full? Are all windows clean
inside and outside?
Wiper Blades: Are they in good
shape?
Fuel. Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have
you checked all levels?
Lights: Are they all working? Are the
lenses clean?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as
“highway hypnosis”? Or is itjust plain
falling asleep at thewheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch
of road with the same scenery, along with
the hum of the tires on the road, the drone
of the engine, and the rushof the wind
against the vehicle that can make you
sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it
does, your vehicle can leave the road in
less than a second, and you could crash
and be injured.
What can you do about highway
hypnosis? First, be aware that it can
happen.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well
ventilated, with a comfortably cool
interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan theroad
ahead and to thesides. Check your
mirrors and your instruments
frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into
a rest, service, or parking area and
take a nap, get some exercise, or both.
For safety, treat drowsiness on the
highway as an emergency.
Tires: Theyare vitally important to a
safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread
good enoughfor long-distance
driving? Are the tires all inflated to
the recommended pressure?
Weather Forecasts: What’s the
weather outlook along your route?
Should you delay yourtrip a short
time to avoida major storm system?
0
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
163...
Your Driving and the Road
B
Know how to go down hills. The most
important thing to know is this: let
your engine do some of the slowing
down. Shift to a lower gear when you
go down a steep or long hill.
Hill and Mountain
Roads
Know how to go uphill. You may
want to shift down toa lower gear.
The lower gears help cool your engine
and transaxle, andyou can climb the
hill better.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is
different from driving in flat or rolling
terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or
if you’re planning to visit there, here are
some tips that can make your trips safer
and more enjoyable.
e Keep your vehicle in good shape.
Check all fluid levels and also the
brakes, tires, cooling system and
transaxle. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
.. . 164
0
Stay in your own lane when driving
on two-lane roads in hills or
mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that letyou stay in your own
lane.
Your Driving and the Road
Driving on Snowor Ice
Most of the time, those places where your
tires meet the road probablyhave good
traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between
your tires and the road, you can have a
very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot
less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.”
Very cold snow or ice can be slick and
hard to drive on. But wet icecan be even
more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get “wet ice”
when it’s about freezing (32°F; OOC) and
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid
. 166
lriving on wet ice until salt and sand
:rews can getthere.
Allow greater following distanceon
any slippery road.
Nhatever the condition -- smooth ice,
lacked, blowing or loose snow -- drive
vith caution.
Watch for slippery spots.The road
might be fine until youhit a spot that’s
covered with ice. On an otherwise
clear road, ice patches may appearin
shaded areas where the sun can’t
reach: around clumps of trees, behind
buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surfaceof a curve or
an overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roadsare clear. If you see
a patch of ice ahead of you, brake
before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you’re actuallyon the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
f you have the traction control system,
Leep the system on. It will improve your
tbility to accelerate when driving on a
ilippery road. Even though your vehicle
las a traction control system, you’ll want
o slow down and adjust your driving to
.he road conditions. See “Traction Control
system” in the Index.
[f you don’t have the traction control
Gystem, accelerate gently. Try not to break
:he fragile traction. If you accelerate too
Fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish
:he surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your
2bility to make a hard stop on a slippery
road. Even though you have an anti-lock
braking system, you’ll want to begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats
-- anything you can wrap around yourself
or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but
be careful.
If You’re Caught in a
Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you
could be in a serious situation. You should
probably stay with your vehicle unless
you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here
are some thingsto do to summon help and
keep yourself and your passengerssafe:
Turn on your hazard flashers. Tiea red
cloth to your vehicleto alert police that
you’ve been stoppedby the snow. Put on
extra clothing or wrapa blanket around
you. If you have no blankets or extra
clothing, make body insulators from
Run your engine only as long as you
must. This saves fuel. When you run the
engine, make it go a little faster than just
idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly.
This uses less fuel for the heat that you
get and it keeps the battery charged. You
will need a well-charged battery to restart
the vehicle, and possibly for signaling
later on with your headlights. Let the
heater run for awhile.
167
...
Your Driving and the Road
If You’re Caught in a
Blizzard (CONX)
Then, shut the engine off and close the
window almost all the way to preserve the
heat. Start the engine again and repeat this
only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you
can. To help keep warm, you can get out
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous
exercises every half hour or so until help
comes.
... 168
I‘
Towing a Trailer
NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in
costly repairs not coveredby your
warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section, and
see your Pontiac dealer for
important information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
-
Your vehicle can tow a trailer.
To identify
what the vehicle trailering capacityis for
your vehicle, you should read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering
is different thanjust driving your vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in
handling, durability, andfuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this section. In itare
many time-tested, important trailering
tips and safety rules. Manyof these are
important for your safety and that of
your
passengers. So please read this section
carefully before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the
engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and
tires are forced to work harder against the
drag of the added weight.The engine is
required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads,
generating extra heat. What’s more,the
trailer adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling
requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points.
There are many different laws having
to do with trailering. Make sure your
rig will be legal, not only where ,you
live but also where you’ll be driving.
A good source for this information
can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control if your
trailer will weigh 2000 pounds
(900 kg) or less. You should always
use a sway control if your trailer
will weigh more than 2000 pounds
(900 kg).
You can ask a hitch dealer about sway
controls.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the
first 500 miles (800 km) your new
vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or
other parts could be damaged.
0
Then, during the first 500 miles
(800km) that you tow a trailer, don’t
drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of
your vehicle wear in at the heavier ..
loads.
,
Three important considerations have to do
with weight:
Your Driving andthe Road
Weight of the Trailer
Tongue
p
I
A
1Weight of the Trailer
€low heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,400
€Iounds (630 kg) with up to six occupants
c)r more than 2,000 pounds(900 kg) with
11p to two occupants unless you have the
(>ptionaltrailer-towing package. With the
t railer-towing package (available only with
the 3800 V6 engine), your vehicle can tow
I~pto 2,400 pounds (1 090 kg) with up
tlD six occupants or up to 3,000 pounds
( 1 360 kg) with up to two occupants.
E3ut even that can betoo heavy. It depends
Cm
how you plan to use your rig. For
e:xample, speed, altitude, road grades,
Cmtside temperature and how much your
\lehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
... I 70
B
important. And, it can also depend on an!
special equipment that you have on your
vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering
information or advice, or you can write u
at:
Customer Assistance Center
Pontiac Division
One Pontiac Plaza
Pontiac, MI 48340-2952
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited,
Customer Assistance Center,
1908 Colonel Sam Drive,
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7.
The tongue load(A) of any trailer is an
important weight to measure because it
affects the total capacity weight
of your
vehicle. The capacity weight includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people whowill
be riding in the vehicle. And if you will
tow a trailer, you must subtract the tongue
load from your vehicle’s capacity weight
because your vehicle will be carrying that
weight, too. See “Loading Your Vehicle’’
in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
If you’re using a “dead-weight” hitch, the
trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10% of
the total loaded trailer weight
(B). If you
have a “weight-distributing” hitch, the
trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12% of
the total loaded trailer weight(B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh
the trailer and then the tongue, separately,
to see if the weights are proper. If they
aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items aroundin
the trailer.
Total Weight on Your
Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to
the limit for coldtires. You’ll find these
numbers on the Certification labelat the
rear edge of the driver’s door
Certificationnire label at the edgeof the
driver’s door orsee “Tire Loading” inthe
Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the
GVW limit for your vehicle.
Hitches
It’s important to have thecorrect hitch
equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks
going by, and rough roads are a few
reasons why you’ll need the right hitch,
Here are some rules to follow:
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when
loaded, will weigh more than 2,000
pounds (900 kg), be sure to use a
0
The bumpers on your vehicle are not
intended for hitches. Do not attach
rental hitches or other bumper-type
hitches to them. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not
attach to thebumper.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between
your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the
properly mounted, weight-distributing safety chains under the tongue of the
hitch and sway control of the proper
trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
size. Thisequipment is very important the road if it becomes separated from the
for proper vehicle loading and good
hitch. Instructions about safety chains
handling when you.’re driving,
may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer
Will you have to make any holes in
manufacturer. Follow the manufact6,rer’s
the body of your vehicle when you
recommendation for attaching safety
install a trailerhitch? If you do, then
chains. Always leave just enough dack so
be sure to seal the holes later when
you can turn with your rig. And, never
you remove the hitch. If you don’t
allow safety chains to dragon the ground.
seal them, deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) from your exhaust can get into
your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide”
in the Index). Dirt and water can, too.
171
...
Your Driving and the Road
Trailer Brakes
[f your trailer weighs more than 1,000
pounds (450 kg) loaded, then it needs its
own brakes -- and they must be adequate.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to
install, adjust and maintain them properly.
:ontroller by hand to be sure the brakes
ire working. This lets you check your
Aectrical connection at the same time.
NOTE: Because you have anti-lock
brakes, do not try to tap into your
vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both
brake systems won’t work well, or at all.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount
of experience. Before setting out for the
open road, you’ll want to get to know
your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel
of handling and braking with the added
weight of the trailer. And always keep in
mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now a good deal longer and not nearly so
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch
and platform, safety chains, electrical
connector, lights, tires and mirror
adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer
moving and then apply the trailer brake
... 172
During your trip, check occasionally to be
sure that the loadis secure, and that the
lights and any trailer brakes are still
working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when driving
your vehicle withouta trailer. This can
help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
1 Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up
ahead when you’re towinga trailer. And,
because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll
need to go much farther beyondthe
passed vehicle before you canreturn to
your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottomof the steering wheel
with one hand. Then, to move thetrailer
to the left,just move that hand to the left.
To move the trailerto the right, move
your hand to the right. Always back up
slowly and, if possible, have someone
guide you.
Making Turns
Turn Signals When
Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has
to have a different turn signal flasher and
extra wiring. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you
signal a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lights will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to
turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows
on your instrument panel will flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when
they are not. It’s important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs
are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before you start down a long or steep
downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you
might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hotand no longer
work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and
reduce your speed to around 45 mph
(70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of
engine and transaxle overheating.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so your
trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,
road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in
advance.
173...
Your Driving andthe Road
Parking on Hills
You really should not park your vehicle,
with a trailer attached, on a hill. If
something goes wrong, your rig could
start to move. People can be injured, and
both your vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a
hill, here’s how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t
shift into “P” (Park) yet.
When You Are Ready to
Leave After Parkingon a
Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold
the pedal down while you:
0
Start your engine;
0
Shift into a gear; and
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place chocks under the
trailer wheels.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
3. When the wheel chocks are in place,
4. Stop and have someone pick up and
store the chocks.
release the regular brakes until the
chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then
apply your parking brake, and then
shift to “ P ’ (Park).
5. Release the regular brakes.
174
of the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer
Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often
when you’re pulling a trailer. See the
Maintenance Schedule for more on this.
Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic transaxle
fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, belts,
cooling system, and brake adjustment.
Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them
quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good
idea to review these sections before you
start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch
nuts and bolts are tight.
Part 5
Problems on the Road
H e r e you’ll find what to do about
some problems that can occur on the
road.
HazardWarningFlashers ............................................
Jumpstarting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TowingYourPontiac ...............................................
EngineOverheating ................................................
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ChangingaFlatTire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compactspare ....................................................
If You’re Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow ............................
176
177
181
186
193
193
202
202
175
c
...
Problems on the Road
Hazard Warning
Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you
warn others. They also let police know
you have a problem. Your front and rear
turn signal lights will flash on and off.
But they won’t flash if you‘re braking.
. . . 176
Your hazard warning flashers switch is 01n 1:o turn off the flashers, pull out on the
C:ollar. When the hazard warning flashers
the steering column, below the ignition
a.re on, your turn signals won’t work.
switch. Press the button in to make your
front and rear turn signal lights flash on
I Other Warning Devices
and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no
matter what position your key is in, and
even if the key isn’t in.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can
S,et one up at the side of the road about
)OO feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
c
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down,you may
want to use another vehicle and some
jumper cables to start your Pontiac. But
please follow the steps below to doit
safely.
On vehicles equipped with the optional
power sliding door,a low voltage battery
may cause the systemto become
inoperative. Referto “Power Sliding
Door” in the Index for more information.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that
wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty.
Trying to start your Pontiac by
pushing or pulling it won’t work,
and it could damage your vehicle.
I
To Jump Start Your
Pontiac:
. Check the other vehicle. It must have
a 12-volt battery with a negative
ground system.
..>
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged.
1
C
Problems on the Road
To Jump Start Your
Pontiac: (CONTI
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the
jumper cables can reach, but be sure
the vehicles aren’t touching each
other. If they are, it could cause a
ground connection you don’t want.
You wouldn’t be able to start your
Pontiac, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
You could be injured if the vehicles roll.
Set the parking brake firmly on each
vehicle. Make sure the vehicles are in
“P’ (Park), or “N” (Neutral) if equipped
with manual transmission.
. . e
178
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Turn off all lights that aren’t needed,
and radios. This will avoid sparks and
help save both batteries. And it could
save your radio!
NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could
be badly damaged. The repairs
wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the
batteries.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t
have loose or missing insulation. If
they do, you could get a shock. The
vehicles could be damaged, too.
Your Pontiac has a remote positive (+)
jump starting terminal. The terminal is in
the red box on the same sideof the engine
compartment as your battery. You should
always use the remote positive (+)
terminal instead of the positive (+)
terminal on your battery.
Before you connect the cables, here are
some basic things you should know:
Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and
negative (-) will go to negative (-) or a
metal engine part. Don’t connect (+) to
(-) or you’ll get a short that would
damage the battery and maybe other
parts, too.
To open the remote positive (+) terminal
box, pull the tab and open the cover.
179..
.
Problems on the Road
To Jump Start Your
Pontiac: (CONT.)
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle
with the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has
one.
7. Don’t let the other end touch metal.
Connect it to the positive (+) terminal
of the good battery. Usea remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has
one.
8. Now connect the black negative (-)
cable to the good battery’s negative
(-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end touch anything
until the next step. The other end of
the negative cable doesn’t go to the
dead battery. It goes to a heavy
unpainted metal part onthe engine of
the vehicle with the dead battery.
... 180
3. Attach the cable at least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move.
The electrical connectionis just as
good there, but the chance of sparks
getting back to the battery is much less.
10.Now start the vehicle with thegood
battery and run the engine fora while.
11.Try to start the vehicle with the dead
battery. If it won't startafter a few
tries, it probably needs service.
B
C
DEAD BATTERY
12.Remove the cables in reverse order to
prevent electrical shorting. Take care
that they don't touch each other or an!
other metal.
I
Towing Your Pontiac
'ry to have a GM dealer or a professional
)wing service tow your Pontiac. The
sua1 towing equipment is:
L
A) Sling-type tow truck
B) Wheel-lift tow truck
C) Car carrier.
F your vehicle has been changed or
Iodified since it was factory-new by
dding aftermarket items like fog lamps,
ero skirting, or special tires and wheels,
lese instructions and illustrations may
ot be correct.
lefore you do anything, turn on the
azard warning flashers.
181
...
Problems on the Road
Towing Your Pontiac
(CONK)
When you call, tell the towing service:
That your vehicle cannot be towed
from the front with sling-type
equipment.
0
That your vehicle has front-wheel
drive.
0
The make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
0
Whether you can still move the shift
lever.
0
If there was an accident, what was
damaged.
When the towing service arrives, let the
tow operator know that this manual
contains detailed towing instructions and
illustrations. The operator may want to
see them.
... 182
When your vehicle is being towed, have
the ignition key off. The steering wheel
should be clamped in a straight-ahead
position, with a clamping device designed
for towing service. Do not use the
vehicle’s steering column lock for this.
The transaxle should be in Neutral and the
parking brake released.
Don’t have your vehicle towed on the front
wheels, unless you must. If the vehicle
must be towed on the front wheels, don’t
go more than 35 mph (55 km/h) or farther
than 50 miles (80 km) or your transaxle
will be damaged. If these limits must be
exceeded, then the front wheels have to be
supported on a dolly.
NOTICE:
Towing from the
Front-Vehicle Hook-up
Before hooking up to a tow truck, be sure
to read all the information on “Towing
Your Pontiac” earlier in this section.
Towing a vehicle over rough
surfaces could damage a vehicle.
Damage can occur from vehicle to
ground or vehicle to wheel-lift .’
equipment. To help avoid damage,
install a towing dolly and raise
vehicle until adequate clearance i s
obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
Do not attach winch cables or
J-hooks to suspension componeqts
when using car carrier equipment,
Always use T-hooks inserted in the
T-hook slots.
-
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type
equipment or fascia/fog light
damage will occur. Use wheel-lift or
car carrier equipment. Additional
ramping may be required for car
carrier equipment.
183.
..
Problems on the Road
A
I
I
I
Towing from the
Front-Vehicle Hook-up
, .
(CON?)
1. Attach T-hook chains on both sides
in the slotted holes in the bottom of
the frame rails, about 2 feet behind
the front wheels.
2. Attach a separate safety chain around
the outboard end of each lower control
arm.
Towing from the
9ear-Vehicle Hook-up
5efore hooking up to a tow truck, be sure
3 read all the information on "Towing
lour Pontiac" earlier in this section.
1 Attach T-hook chains on both sides in
the slotted holesin the frame railsjust
ahead of the rear wheels.
,
-
,
, $'
j
.
NOTICE'
~
8
Towing a vehicle over rough
surfaces could damage a vehicle.
Damage can oGcur from vehicle to
ground or vehicle to wheel-lift :.
equipment. To help avoid damage,
install a towing dolly and raise
vehicle until adequate clearance is
obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
Do not attach Winch cables or
J-hooks to suspension componehts
when using car carrier equipme&
Always use T-hooks inserted in @e
T-hook slots.
',
2. Position the lower sling crossbar
directly underthe rear bumper. No
4x4 wood beam is needed.
3. Attach a separate safety chain around
the end of each .axle inboard of the
spring.
4. Be certain your vehicle is towed no
fasteT than 35 mph (55 km/h) and no
farther than 50 miles (80 km) to avoid
damage to your transaxle.
,
I)
...
185
...
Problems on the Road
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage
an your Pontiac’s instrument panel. See
“Coolant Temperature Gage” in the
[ndex.
If Sfeam /s Coming From
Your Engine
-..I86
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant,
your vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
If No Steam Is Coming
From Your Engine
If you no longer have the overheat
warning, you can drive. Just to be safe,
drive slower for about ten minutes. If the
warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If you get the overheat warningbut see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine can get
If the warning continues, pull over, stop,
a little too hot when you:
and park your vehicle right away.
0 Climb a long hill on a hot day.
If there’s still no signof steam, you can
idle the engine for two or three minutes
0 Stop after high speed driving.
while you’re parked, to see if the warning
Idle for long periods in traffic.
stops. But then, if you still have the
warning,
TURN OFF THE ENGINE
Tow a trailer.
AND GET EVERYONE OUT OF THE
If you get the overheat warning withno
VEHICLE until it cools down.
sign of steam, try this fora minute or so:
You may decide not to lift the hood but to
1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it get service help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood,
here’s what you’ll see:’
(A) Coolant recovery tank
(B) Radiator pressure cap
(c) Electric engine fan, or fans if you
have the 3800 V6 engine.
C
Off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the
highest fan speed and open the
window as necessary.
3. Try to keep your engine under load
[f the coolant inside the coolant recovery
tank is boiling, don’t do anything else
until it cools down.
(in a drive gear where the engine runs
slower).
187
...
Problems on the Road
The coolant level should beat or above
:he“FULL HOT” mark. If it isn’t, you
nay have a leak in the radiator hoses,
leater hoses, radiator, water pump or
somewhere else in the cooling system.
Cooling System (CONT.)
I I NOTICE:
I
Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant isn’t covered
by your warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, check to see
if the electric enginefan is running. If the
engine is overheating, the fan should be
running. If it isn’t, your vehicle needs
service.
How to Add Coolant tothe
Coolant Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but
the coolant level isn’t at or abovethe
“FULL HOT” mark, mark, add a 50/50
mixture of clean water (preferably
distilled) and a proper antifreeze at the
coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for more
information about the proper coolant
mix.)
E
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator,
heater core and other parts. Use the
recommended coolant.
vVhen the coolant in the coolant recovery
tim n k is at or above the “FULL HOT”
ITlark,
start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s
0:
ne more thing you can try.You can add
tf le proper coolant mix directly to the
rzldiator but be sure the cooling system is
C(301 before you do it.
189
...
Problems on the Road
Uow to Add Coolant to the
Radiator
I. You can remove the radiator pressure
cap when the cooling system,
including the radiator pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly to the
left until it first stops. (Don’t press
down while turning the pressure cap).
... 190
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. 3I. Fill the radiator with the proper mix,
A hiss means there is still some
up to thebase of the filler neck.
pressure left.
1. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to
the “FULL HOT” mark.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap,
but now push down as you turn it.
Remove the pressure cap.
191
...
Problems on the Road
7. By this time the coolantlevel inside
the radiator filler neck may be lower.
If the level is lower, add more
of the
proper mix through thefiller neck
until the level reaches the baseof the
filler neck.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant
recovery tank, but leave the radiator
pressure cap off.
... 192
6. Start the engine and let it run until you
can feel the upper radiator hose gettinlr
hot. Watch out for the engine fan(s).
Y
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while
you’re driving, especially if you maintain
your tires properly. If air goes out ofa
tire, it’s much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a
“blowout,” here are a few tips about what
to expect and what to do:
Air Influtor
Your vehicle may have an air inflator for
use in bringihg tires up to the proper
pressure. To learn about it, see “Air
Inflator System” in the Index.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create
a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that
side. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, then
gently brake to a stop well out of the
traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve,
acts much like a skid and may require the
same correction you’d use in a skid. In
any rear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the way you
want the vehicle to go. It may be very
8. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
the arrows on the pressure capline up Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if
like this.
possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next section shows
how to use yourjacking equipment to
change a flat tire safely.
193...
Problems on the Road
Changing a Flat Tire
(CONK)
The following steps will tell you how to
use the jack and changea tire.
The equipment you'll need is in the
storage compartment at the rear of the
vehicle.
... 194
1. Open the jack storage compartment by
sliding the latch down and removing
the compartment cover.
2. Remove the jack and jacking tools by
loosening the wing nut and retainer
bar.
'. The compact spare tire is located
under the vehicle, behind the rear
bumper. Insert the narrow end of the
shaft into the hole above the rear
bumper. Then attach the folding
wrench to the shaft.
3. Separate the plastic pouch from the
jack and remove the jacking tools
(folding wrench and shaft) from the
pouch.
.
6. Slide the cable retainer through the
center of the spare, then place'ihe
compact spare tire near the flat:tire.
Rotate the folding wrench
counterclockwise to lower the
compact spare tire until it can be
pulled from under the vehicle.
195...
Problems on the Road
Changing a Flat Tire
(CONT.)
7. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels,
each wheel nut is covered with a
nylon cap. Use the folding wrench to
remove the nylon caps from the whee
nuts before you loosen the nuts.
If your vehicle has the plastic
“bolt-on’’ wheel covers, you cannot
separate the nylon wheel nut caps
from the cover. Loosen them
completely using the folding wrench,
and remove the wheel cover. If the
wheel nut caps have been completely
loosened, the wheel cover will come
off easily.
... 196
8. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels,
each wheel has one wheel locknut in
place of a standard wheel nut. A
special wheel lock key (removal tool)
and instructions are stored in your
glove box. Attach the wheel lock key
to the socket of the folding wrench.
Remove the locking wheel nut by
turning counterclockwise.
If your vehicle has the plastic
“bolt-on” wheel covers, you will not
have a locking wheel nut.
9. Loosen the wheel nuts-but
do not
remove them-using the folding
wrench.
1O.Attach the folding wrench tothe jack,
and rotate the wrench clockwiseto
rais'e thejack head a few inches.
1. Near each wheel, there is a notch in
the vehicle's frame. Position the jack
and raise the jack head until itfits
firmly into the notch in the vehicle's
frame nearest the flat tire. Do not raist
the vehicle yet. Put the compact spare
tire near you.
C
197...
Problems on the Road
I3.Remove all the wheel nuts and take
off the flat tire.
Changing a Flat Tire
(CONI)
NOTICE:
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned will damage
the vehicle or may allow the vehicle
to fall off the jack.Be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper
location before raising your vehicle.
.
b.
198
12.Raise the vehicle by rotating the
folding wrench clockwise in the jack.
Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for
the spare tire to fit.
14.Remove any corrosion or dirt from the 15.Replace the wheel nuts with the
wheel bolts, mounting surfacesor
rounded end of the nuts toward the
spare wheel. Place the spare on the
wheel. Tighten each .nut by hand until
wheel mounting surface.
the wheel is held against the hub.
16.Lower thevehicle by attaching the
folding wheel wrench to the jabk and
rotating the wrench counterclockwise.
..,
Lower the jack completely.
C
199...
Problems on the Road
NOTICE:
Wheel covers won’tfit on your
compact spare.If you try to put a
wheel cover on your compact spare,
you could damage the cover or the
spare.
‘topsomewhere as soon as you can and
ave the nuts tightened with a torque
rrench. The torque setting should be100
ound-feet (140 Nom).
Changing a Flat Tire
(CONI)
17.Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a
criss-cross sequence, as shown.
Don’t try to put a wheel cover on the
compact spare tire. It won’t fit. Store the
wheel cover securely in the rear of the
vehicle until you have the flat tire
repaired or replaced.
I
. 200
18.Lay the flat tire near the rearof the
vehicle with the valve stem down.
Slide the cable retainer throughthe
center of the wheel and raise theflat
tire until you hear the hoist
mechanism click twice. This means
the wheel is firmly stored against the
underside of the vehicle.
When storing the spare tire,be certain
to turn the spare so the valve stem is
near the rear of the vehicle. This will
help you to check and maintaintire
19.Replace all jacking tools as they were
pressure in the spare.
stored in the jack storage compartment
and
replace the compartment cover.
Push against the tire to be certainit is
stored firmly.
Unless you have the plastic “bolt-on”
wheel covers, be sure to also store the
nylon nut caps. When you replace the
compact spare with a full-size tire,
replace the bolt-on wheel covers or
the nylon nut caps. Tighten them
“hand tight” over the wheel nuts, using
the folding wrench (see step 7).
201
...
Problems on the Road
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare was fully
inflated when your vehicle was new, it
can lose air after a time. Check the
inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa). After installing the
compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make
sure your spare tire is correctly inflated.
The compact spare is made toperform
well at posted speed limits for distances
up to 3,000 miles ( 5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have your full-size
tire repaired or replaced where you want.
Of course, it’s best to replace your spare
with a full-size tire as soon as you can.
Your spare will last longer and be in good
shape in case you need it again.
NOTICE:
Don’t take your compact spare
through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on the rails.That can
damage the tire and wheel, and
maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Dlon’t use your compact spare on some
other vehicle.
And don’t mix your compact spare or
W heel with other wheels or tires. They
W on’t fit. Keep your spare and its wheel
tolgether.
NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact
spare. Using them will damage your
vehicle and destroy the chains too.
Don’t use tire chains on your
compact spare.
. e .
202
I
If You’re Stuck: In
Sand, Mud, Ice or
Snow
Vhat you don’t want to do when your
rehicle is stuck is to spin your wheels.
?he method known as “rocking’’ can help
~ O Uget out when you’re stuck, but you
nust use caution.
NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy
parts of your vehicle aswell as the
tires. If you spin the wheels too fast
while shifting yourtransaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your
transaxle.
Rocking your vehicle to get it out:
First, turn your steering wheel left and
right. That will clear the area around your
front wheels. You should turn your
traction control system off. (See “Traction
Control System” in the Index.) Then shift
back and forth between “R” (Reverse)
and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and
press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. If that
doesn’t get you out after a few tries,you
may need to be towed out. If you do need
to be towed out, see “Towing Your
Pontiac” in the Index.
Notes
204
Part 6
Service & Appearance Care
. . . . . 206
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . 207
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . 209
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . 211
Engineoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . 217
Transaxle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . 219
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H e r e you will find information about
. . . . . . 221
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. .....
the care of your Pontiac. This part
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . 222
begins with service and fuel
information. and then it shows how to Brake Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
check importantfluid and lubricant
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.....
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
levels. There is also technical
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .....
. . . . . . . . . . . 226
Headlight Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . .
information about your vehicle.and a Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
section devotedto its appearance
Loading YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.....
. . . . . . . . . . . 228
care.
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
...
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Appearance Care Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . .
. . . ......................
242
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
242
Add-on Electrical Equipment . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Fuses & Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...
. . . . . . . . . . . 248
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
...
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts . . .
.......................
251
ReplacementBulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
205
...
Service & Appearance Care
Doing Your Own Service
Work
[f you want to do some of your own
jervice work, you’ll want to get the
,roper Pontiac Service Manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your
Pontiac than this manual can, To order the
proper service manual, see “Service
Publications” in the Index.
I Service
four Pontiac dealer knows your vehicle
)est and wants you to be happy with it.
Ne hope you’ll go to your dealer for all
lour service needs. You’ll get genuine
3M parts and GM-trained and supported
;ervice people.
Your vehicle has an air bag system.
Before attempting to do your own service
work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Pontiac” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts
receipts and list the mileage and the date
of any service work you perform. See
“Maintenance Record” in the Index.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM
dehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have
me of these marks.
NOTICE:
If you try to do your own service
work without knowing enough
about it, your vehicle could be
damaged.
...206
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If
the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If
it’s bad enough, it can damage your
engine.
Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline ratedat
87 octane or higher. It should meet
specifications ASTM D4814 in the U.S.
and CGSB 3.5-92 in Canada. These fuels
should have the proper additives,so you
should not have to add anything to
the fuel.
In the U.S. and Canada, it’s easy to be
sure you get the right kindof gasoline
(unleaded). You’ll see “UNLEADED”
right on the pump. And only unleaded
nozzles will fit into your vehicle’s
filler neck.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or
higher and you still hear heavy knocking,
your engine needs service. But.don’t
worry if you hear a little pinging noise
when you’re accelerating or driving up a
hill. That’s normal, and you don’t have to
buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of
pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock
that means you have a problem.
What about gasoline with blending
materials that contain oxygen
[oxygenates), such as MTBE or alcohol?
NOTICE:
Fuel that is more than 5% methanol
is bad for your vehicle. Don’t use it.
It can corrode metal parts in your
fuel system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
wouldn’t be covered under your
warranty. And even at 5% or less,
there must be “cosolvents” and
corrosion preventers in this fuel to
help avoid these problems.
Fuel Capacity: 20 U.S. Gallons (76L).
Use unleaded fuel only.
MTBE is “methyl tertiary-butyl ether.”
Fuel that is no more than 15% MTBE is
Fine for your vehicle.
Ethanol is ethyl or grain alcohol.
Properly-blended fuel that is no more
than 10% ethanol is fine for your vehicle.
Methanol is methyl or wood alcohol.
207..
.
Service & Appearance Care
Gasolines for CleanerAir
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
Your use of gasoline with deposit control
additives will help prevent deposits from
forming i n your engine and fuel system.
That helps keep your engine in tune and
your emission control system working
properly. It’s good for your vehicle, and
you’ll be doing your part for cleaner air.
[f you plan on driving in another country
outside the U.S. or Canada, unleaded fuel
may be hard to find. Do not use leaded
gasoline. If you use even one tankful,
your emission controls won’t work well
or at all. With continuous use, spark plugs
can get fouled, the exhaust system can
Many gasolines are now blended with
oxygenates. General Motors recommends corrode, and your engine oil can
that you use gasolines with these blending deteriorate quickly. Your vehicle’s oxygen
materials, such as MTBE and ethanol. By sensor will be damaged. All of that means
costly repairs that wouldn’t be covered by
doing so, you can help clean the air,
especially in those parts of the country
your warranty.
that have high carbon monoxide levels.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
club, or contact a major oil company that
now producing reformulated gasolines.
does business in the country where you’ll
These gasolines are specially designed to be driving.
reduce vehicle emissions. General Motors
You can also write us at the following
recommends that you use reformulated
address
for advice. Just tell us where
gasoline. By doing so, you can help clean
you’re going and give your Vehicle
the air, especially in those parts of the
identification Number (VIN).
country that have high ozone levels.
General Motors Overseas Distribution
You should ask your service station
Corporation,
operators if their gasolines contain deposit
North American Export Sales (NAES)
control additives and oxygenates, and if
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
they have been reformulated to reduce
Oshawa, Ontario L l H 8P7
vehicle emissions.
.
208
I Filling
Your Tank
:he cap is behind a hinged door on the
eft side of your vehicle. You will notice
hat on the inside of the hinged door there
s a place to hold the gas cap while you
re adding fuel.
3e careful not to spill gasoline. Clean
5asoline from painted surfaces as soon as
Iossible. See “Cleaning the Outside of
four Pontiac” in the Index.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean
gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as
possible. See “Cleaning the Outside of
Your Pontiac” in the Index.
When you put the cap back on, turn it to
the right until you hear a clicking noise.
NOTICE:
To take off the cap, turn it slowly to the
left (counterclockwise).
If you need a new cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get
one for you. If you get the wrong
type, it may not fit or have proper
venting, and yourfuel tank and
emissions system might bedamaged.
Checking Things
Under the Hood
Hood Release
C
To open the hood, first pull the hood
release handle inside the vehicle.
Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull
up on the underhood release. Lift the hood.
209..
.
Service & Appearance Care
Checking Things
Under the Hood (CONK)
The hood prop may be hotdue to
increased engine temperatures under the
good, so be careful when handling it. Use
your good prop sleeve when handling the
good prop.
Pull forward on the hood propto release it
from its storage clip. Then put the end of
the hood prop into the slot in the
underside of the hood.
8
210
Before closing the hood, be sure all the
filler caps are on properly. Thenlift the
hood to relieve the pressure on the hood
prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot
in the hood and return the propto its
retainer. Then just let the hood down and
close it firmly.
Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil
every time you get fuel. In order to get an
accurate reading,the oil must be warm
and the vehicle must be on level ground.
Turn off the engineand give the oil a few
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If
you don’t, theoil dipstick might not show
the actual level.
Underhood Light
(oPTIcTN)
Your underhood light will go on when
you open the hood.
To Check Engine Oil
3.1L V6: Checking Engine Oil
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a
paper towel or cloth, then push it back in
all the way. Remove it again, keeping the
tip lower, and check the level.
C
3800 V6: Checking Engine Oil
211
0
.
.
Service & Appearance Care
W e n to Add Oil
the oil is at or below the ADD mark,
len you’ll need to add some oil. But you
lust use the right kind. This section
tplains what kind of oil to use. For
rankcase capacity, see “Capacities and
pecifications” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your
engine has so much oil that the oil
level gets above the cross-hatched
area that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be
damaged.
L1L V6: Adding Engine Oil
3eginning midyear 1993, oils of the
roper quality for your vehicle will be
dentified with this new “starburst”
ymbol. The “starburst” symbol indicates
hat the oil has been certifiedby the
imerican Petroleum Institute (API), and
s suitable for usein your gasoline engine
ust fill it enough toput the level
xnewhere in the proper operating range.
ush the dipstick all the way back in
[hen you’re through.
r‘ou should look for thison the front of
he oil container, and use& oils that
lisplay this new symbol.
3800 V6: Adding Engine Oil
212
What Kind of Oil to Use
r‘ou should also use the proper viscosity
)il for your vehicle,as shown in the
ollowing chart:
Recommended SAE Viscosity
Grade Engine Oils
For best fuel economy andcold starting,
select the lowest SAE viscosity grade oil
for the expected temperature range.
HOT
HWTHER
\
;AE5W-30 (3.1L V6 Engine)
IAE 1OW-30 (3800 V6 Engine)
shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is bes;
jr your vehicle. However, you can use
AE 1OW-30 if it's going to be 0°F
- 18"C) or above. These numbers on an
il container show its viscosity, or
lickness. Do not use other viscosity oils,
uch as SAE 1OW-40 or SAE 20W-50.
is shown in the chart, SAE 1OW-30 is
est for your vehicle. However, you can
se SAE 5W-30 if it's going to be'colder
Ian 60°F ( 16°C) before your next oil
hange. When it's very cold, you should
se SAE 5W-30. These numbers dn an oil
ontainer show its viscosity, or thickness.
10 not use other viscosity oils, such as
AE 1OW-40 or SAE 20W-50.
LS
COLD
WEATHER
IF NEITHER SAE5W-30 NOR SAE 1OW-30
GRADE OILS ARE AVAILABLE, SAE 30
GRADE MAY BE USED AT TEMPERATURES
PBOVE 40 DEGREES F (4 DEGREES C).
DO NOT USE SAE 1OW-40, SAE 2OW-50 OR
MOTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED.
F you cannot find oils with the new
starburst" symbol on the front of the
ontainer, you should look for and use
ils containing the following three things:
213...
Service & Appearance Care
Recommended SAE Viscosity
Grade Engine Oils
For best fuel economy and cold starting,
select the lowest SAE viscosity grade oil
for the expected temperature range;
What Kind of Oil to Use
(CONT)
0
“SG” or “SH” must be on the oil
container, either by itself or combined
with other quality designations, such
a 6 “SH/CD,” “SH,SG,CD,” or
“SG/CD” etc. These letters show
American Petroleum Institute (API)
levels of quality.
LOOK FOR
ONELABELS
OF THESE &souN#
HOT
WEATHER
LYI)IYCC
0
-
SAE 5W-30
SAE 1OW-30
PREFERRED
(-18”’)
COLD
WEATHER
IF NEITHER SAE 5W-30 NOR SAE 1OW-30
GRADE OILS ARE AVAILABLE, SAE 30
GRADE MAY BE USED AT TEMPERATURES
ABOVE 40 DEGREES F (4 DEGREES C).
DO NOT USE SAE IOW-40, SAE 2OW-50 OR
ANOTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED.
If you use oils thatdo not have
either the “starburst” symbol or an
API SH designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your
warranty.
GM Goodwrench@ oil(in Canada, GM
Engine Oil) meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
SAE 1OW-30 (3800 V6 Engine)
SAE 5W-30 (3.1L V6 Engine)
0
-
SGor SH
NOTICE:
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your
Pontiac dealer is readyto advise if you
Oils with these words on the container think something should be added.
will help you save fuel.
Energy Conserving I1
These three things are usually included in
a doughnut shaped logo (symbol) on most
containers. If you cannot find oils with
the “starburst” symbol, you should look
for oils with the doughnut shaped symbol,
containing the three things noted above.
When to Change Engine
Oil
Engine Coolant Heater
(Engine Block Heater)
See if any one of these is true for you:
An engine coolant heater can be a big
help if you have to park outside in very
cold weather, 0°F (- 18 “C) or colder. If
your vehicle has this option, see “Engine
Coolant Heater” in the Index.
Most trips are less than 4 miles
(6 km).
0
It’s below freezing outside and most
trips are less than 10 miles (16 km).
I Air
Cleaner
Lefer to the Maintenance Schedule to
etermine when to replace the air filter.
lee“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in
le Index.
What to Do with Used Oil
The engine is at low speed mostof the Did youknow that used engine oil contains
certain elements that may be unhealthyfor
time (as in door-to-door delivery, or
your skin and could even cause cancer?
in stop-and-go traffic).
Don’t let used oilstay on your skinfor very
Youtow a trailer often.
long. Clean your skin and nails with soap
and water, or a good hand cleaner. Washor
Most trips are through dusty places.
properly throw away clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. (See the
If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you needto change your oil manufacturer’s warnings about the use
and disposal of oil products.)
and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
or 3 months -- whichever comes first.
Used oil can be a real threat to the
(See “Change Oil Indicator”in the Index.) environment. If you change your own oil,
be sure to drain all free-flowing oil fromthe
If none of them is true, change the oil
filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of
every 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12
months -- whichever comes first. Change oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the
ground, into sewers, or into streams or
the filter at the first oil change andat
bodies of water.Instead, recycle it by taking
every other oil change after that.
It
it to a place that collects used oil. If you
(See “Change Oil Indicator” in the Index.) have a problem properly disposing of your
used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or
a local recycling center for help.
0
C
NOTICE:
If the air cleaner is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire.
And, dirt can easily get into your
engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner in place
when you’re driving.
Service & Appearance Care
3.1L V6: Checking Air Cleaner Filter
Air Cleaner (CONK)
To Check or Replace:
1. Remove the large wing nut and lift the
cover.
. ..216
3.1L V6: Replacing Air Cleaner Filter
3800 V6: Checking Air Cleaner Filter
2. Remove the air cleaner filter.
To Check or Replace:
3. Be sure to install the air cleaner filter,
1. Loosen the four wing nuts.
replace the cover and tighten the wing
nut securely.
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can
damage your transaxle. Too much
can mean that some of the fluid
could come out and fall on hot
engine parts or exhaust system,
starting a fire. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if you check your
transaxle fluid.
When to Cheekand
Change
3800 V6: Replacing Air Cleaner Filter
A good time to check your automatic
transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil
is changed. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine when to change
your fluid. See “Scheduled Maintenance
Services” in the Index.
2. Pull the top of the air cleaner toward
How to Check
the front of the vehicle and removethe
Because this operation can be a little
air cleaner filter.
difficult, you may choose to have this
3. Be sure to install the air cleaner filter, done at a Pontiac dealership Service
replace the cover and tighten the wing Department.
nuts securely.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all
the instructions here, or you could get a
false reading on the dipstick.
~~
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking
the transaxle fluid level if you have been
driving:
0
When outside temperatures are above
90°F (32°C).
0
At high speed for quite a while.
0
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot
weather.
0
While pulling a trailer.
217...
Service & Appearance Care
How to Check (CONT.)
To get the right reading, the fluid should
be at normal operating temperature,
which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving
about 15 miles (24 km) when outside
temperatures are above 50°F (10°C). If
it’s colder than 50°F ( 1OOC), you may
have to drive longer.
To check the fluid level
1. Park your vehicle on a level place.
3.lL V6: Checking Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
3.1L V6: Adding Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
2. With the parking brake applied, place
the shift lever in “P” (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal,
move the shift lever through each gear
range, pausing for about three seconds
in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in “P” (Park).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to
five minutes.
Then. without shutting off the engine,
follow these steps:
. .218
3800 V6: Checking Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
3800 V6: Adding Automatic Transaxle
Fluid
Pull out the dipstick and wipe it witha
clean rag or paper towel.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough
fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to
the proper level& doesn’t take much
1. Push it back inall the way, wait three
fluid, generally less than a pint (0.5L).
seconds and then pullit back out
Don’t overfill. We recommend ou
again.
use only fluid labeled DEXRON& -111
or
DEXRON@-IIE,because fluids
2. Check both sides of the dipstick, and
with that label are made especially for
read the lower level.The fluid level
your automatic transaxle. Damage
must be in the cross-hatchedarea.
caused by fluid other than
3. If the fluid level is in the acceptable
DEXRON@-111 or DEXRON@-IIEis
range, push the dipstick back inall the
not covered by your newvehicle
way.
warranty.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to
determine what kind of transaxlefluid to
use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
If the fluid level is low, add onlyenough
of the proper fluid to bring the levelinto
the cross-hatched area on thedipstick.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid
level as described under “How to
Check.”
When the correct fluid level is
obtained, push the dipstick back in all
the way.
Engine Coolant
The following explains your cooling
system and how to add coolant when it is
low. If you have a problem with engine
overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
The proper coolant for your Pontiac will:
0
Give freezing protection down to
-34°F (-37°C).
9
Give boiling protection up to 262°F
(128°C).
9
Protect against rust and corrosion.
9
Help keep the proper engine
temperature.
0
Let the warning lights work as they
should.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
219...
Service & Appearance Care
Engine Coolant (CONE)
NOTICE:
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean water
(preferably distilled)and one-half
antifreeze that meets “GM Specification
1825-M,” which won’t damage aluminum
parts. You can also use a recycled coolant
conforming to GM Specification 1825-M
with a complete coolant flush and refill. If
you use this mixture, you don’t need to
add anything else.
If you use an improper coolant mix,
your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost
wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the
mix can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core and other parts.
Adding Coolant
3.1L V6: Checking Coolant
To Check Coolant
When your engine is cold, the coolant
level should be at “COLD’ or a little
higher. When your engine is warm, the
level should be up to “FULL HOT,” or a
little higher.
3800 V6: Checking Coolant
To Add Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper
mix at the coolant recovery tank.
Radiator Pressure Cap
NOTICE:
Your radiator cap is a 15 psi ( 105
kPa) pressure-type cap and must bc;
tightly installed to prevent coolant
loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the
arrows on the cap line up with the
overflow tube on the radiator filler
neck.
When you replace your radiator pressure
cap, an AC’ cap is recommended.
Power Steering Fluid
How To Check Power
Steering Fluid
Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick
with a clean rag. Replace the cap and
completely tighten it. Then remove the
cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
When the engine compartment is hot,
the level should be at the “HOT”
mark.
When the engine compartment is cool,
the level should be at the “FULL
COLD’’ mark.
Thermostat
Add coolant mix at the recovery tank, but
5e careful not to spill it.
Engine coolant temperature is controlled
by a thermostat in the engine coolant
system. The thermostat stops the flow of
soolant through the radiator until the
soolant reaches a preset temperature.
When you replace your thermostat, an
4C’ thermostat is recommended.
221
...
Service & Appearance Care
What to Add
iefer tothe Maintenance Schedule to
letermine what kind of fluid to use. See
‘Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” i
:he Index.
NOTICE:
3.1L V6: Checking Power Steering Fluid
When adding power steering fluid
or making a complete fluid change,
always use the proper fluid. Failure
to use the proper flEid can cause
leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer
Fluid
To Add
Open the cap labeled “WASHER FLUID
ONLY.” Add washer fluid until the bottle
is full.
3800 V6: Checking Power Steering Fluid
How To Check Power
Steering Fluid(CONK)
pF-0
0
When using concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
Don’t mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage your
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water doesn’t clean as
well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank
only 3/4 full when it’s very
cold. This allows for
expansion, which could
damage the tankif it is
completely full.
Don’t use radiator antifreeze
in your windshield washer. It
can damage your washer
system and paint.
when your linings are worn, then you’ll
have too much fluid when you get new
brake linings. You should add (or remove)
brake fluid, as necessary, only when work
is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Brake Master Cylinder
Your brake master cylinder is here. It is
filled with DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake
fluid level in your master cylinder might
go down. The first is that the brakefluid
goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new
linings are put in, the fluid level goes
back up. The otherreason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is,
you should have your brake system fixed,
since a leak means that sooner or later
your brakes won’t work well, or won’t
work at all. So, it isn’t a good idea to “top
off’ your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid
won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
When your brake fluid falls to a low level,
lour brake warning light will come on.
See “Brake System Warning Light” in the
hdex.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only
DOT-3 brake fluid -- such as Delco
Supreme 11 (GM Part No. 1052535).
Use new brake fluid from a sealed
zontainer only, and always clean the brake
fluid reservoir cap before removing it.
@
223 .
Service & Appearance Care
Brake Master Cylinder
Brake Wear
(CONT.)
Your Pontiac has front disc brakes and
rear drum brakes.
NOTICE:
DOT-5 silicone brake fluid
can damage your vehicle.
Don’t use it.
Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid. For
example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in your brake
system can damage brake
system parts so badly that
they’ll have to be replaced.
Brake fluid can damage
paint, so be careful not to
spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See
“Appearance Care” in the
Index.
..
224
Disc brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The
sound may come and go or beheard all
the time your vehicle is moving (except
when you are pushing on the brake peda11
firmly).
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly
brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may
cause a brake squeal when the brakesare
first applied or lightly applied. This does
not mean something is wrong with your
brakes.
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear
indicators, but if you ever heara rear
brake rubbing noise,have the rear brake
linings inspected. Also, the rear brake
drums should be removed and inspected
each time the tires are removed for
rotation or changing. When youhave the
front brakes replaced, have the rear
brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced
as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
Replacing Brake System
Parts
See your dealerif the brake pedaldoes
not return to normal height, or if there is a The braking system on a modern vehicle
rapid increase in pedal travel. This could is complex. Its many parts have to be of
be a sign of brake trouble.
top quality and work welltogether if the
vehicle is to have really good braking.
Brake Adjustment
Vehicles we design and test have
top-quality
GM brake parts in them, as
Every time you apply the brakes
your Pontiac does when it is new. When
moderately, with or without the vehicle
you replace parts of your braking system
moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
-- for example, when your brake linings
[f your brake pedal goes down farther
wear down and you have to have new
:han normal, your rear drum brakes may
ones put in -- be sure you get new
1eed adjustment. Adjust themby backing genuine GM replacement parts. If you
~pand firmly applying the brakesa few
don’t, your brakes may no longer work
cimes.
properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your
vehicle, the balance between your front
and rear brakes can change, for the worse.
The braking performance you’ve come to
expect can change in many other ways if
someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
Battery
Every new Pontiac has a Delco Freedom@
battery. You never have to add water to
one of these. When it’s time for a new
battery. we recommend a Delco
Freedom @ battery. Get one that has the
catalog number shown on the original
battery’s label.
- ‘
-
On vehicles equipped with the optional
power sliding door, a low voltage battery
or replacing the battery may cause the
system to become inoperative. Refer to
“Power Sliding Door” in the Index for
more information.
225
..
Service & Appearance Care
Vehicle Storage
Halogen Bulbs
[f you’re not going to drive your vehicle
For 25 days or more, take off the black,
negative (-) cable from the battery.This
will help keep your battery fromrunning
down.
Headlight Bulb
Replacement
For the type of bulb, see “Replacement
Bulbs” in the Index.
Contact your dealer to learn how to
prepare your vehicle for longer storage
periods.
Jump Starting
For jump starting instructions, see “Jump
Starting” in the Index.
. .. f f 6
1. Remove the two black knobs.
2. Tilt the bulb housing forward.
3. Twist the L-shaped bulb assembly
counterclockwise 116 turn until the
flanges align with the slots in the
retainer ring.
4. Pull out the bulb assembly.
5. Disconnect the bulb wiring harness
from the bulb assembly by lifting the
plastic locking tab.
6. Snap a new bulb assembly onto the
wiring harness.
7. Replace the bulb assembly by
reversing step 3.
8. Replace the bulb housing and the two
black knobs.
Taillight Bulb
Replacement
1
For the type of bulb, see “Replacement
Bulbs” in the Index.
1. Open the rear side windows and
liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws from the
taillight housing.
3. Undo the spring clips under the
weatherstrip at the rear of the side
window.
4. Pull off the entire taillight houking.
5. Pinch the lever and twist the bulb
assembly 1/6 turn counterclockwise to
remove.
6. Remove the bulb by pressing in and
turning 1/8 turn counterclockwise.
7. Line up the small retainer bumps on
the replacement bulb so that the lower
bump slides into the deepest slot in the
housing. Press in and twist the bulb
1/8 turn clockwise. Reposition the
bulb assembly in the taillight housing.
Turn the assembly 1/6 turn clockwise
to lock in place.
227
..
Service & Appearance Care
~
I
MFD BY GENERALMOTORSCORPM1Y3
CAWR FRT
OAWR
RR
LB/KC
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE US.FEDERAL
MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETYSTANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE
OF MANUFACTURE SHOWNABOVE.
NUMBER SERlAL
M.P.V.
MODEL
SPEED
TIRESIZE
RTC
RIM
PSVI(PA (COLD1
MPBY
~
~~
,
SPA
SEEOWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Taillight Bulb
Replacement (CONT.)
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
3. Replace the entire taillight housing
Replacement blades for your vehicle are
24 inches in length. They come in
different types and are removed in
different ways. Here's-how to remove the
type with a release clip:
and screws.
3. Attach the spring clips to the taillight
housing and secure them.
I 0.Close the rear side windows and
liftgate.
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away
from the windshield.
11. Test the bulbs byusing your turn
signals andtaillights.
2. Lift the release clip with a screwdriver
and pull the blade assembly off the
wiper arm.
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on
the wiper arm.
s
.220
Loading Your Vehicle
'he CertificationRire label is found on
he rear edge of the driver's door. The
abel shows the size of your original tires
.nd the inflation pressures needed to
bbtain the gross weight capacityof your
rehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross
Jehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR
ncludes the weightof the vehicle, all
mupants, fuel and cargo.
The Certificationnire label also tells you
he maximum weights for the front and
'ear axles, called Gross Axle.Weight
cating (GAWR). To find out the actual
oads on your front and rear axles, you
leed to go to a weigh station and weigh
lour vehicle. Your dealer can help you
with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they will go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep
going.
Never exceed theGVWR for your
vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or rear
axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you
should spread it out.
Electronic Level Control
On vehicles equipped with optional
electronic level control, the rear
of the
vehicle is automatically kept levelas you
load or unload your vehicle. For more
about this option, see “Electronic Level
Control” in the Index.
Using heavier suspension components to
get added durability might not change
your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to
help you load your vehicle the right way.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover parts
or components that fail because of
overloading.
229.
.-
Service & Appearance Care
Tires
We don’t make tires. Your new vehicle
comes with high quality tires made by
leading tire manufacturers. These tires are
warranted by the tire manufacturers and
their warranties are delivered with every
new Pontiac. If your spare tire is a
different brand than your road tires, you
will have a tire warranty folder from each
of these manufacturers.
/I qflation
- Tire Pressure
TIhe CertificationEire label which is on
thle rear edge of the driver’s door shows
thLe correct inflation pressuresfor your
tilres, when they’re cold. “Cold” means
Y‘3ur vehicle has been sitting forat least
a mile
thtree hours or driven no more than
I
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that
underinflation
overinflation
is
all right. It’s not.If your tires don’t
have enough air (underinflation)
you can get:
Toomuchflexing
Too muchheat
Tireoverloading
0 Badwear
0 Bad handling
0 Bad fueleconomy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
I
NOTICE:(Continued)
If your tires have too much air
(overinflation), you canget:
0 Unusualwear
0 Bad handling
Roughride
0 Needlessdamagefromroad
hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a monthor more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It
should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to
check tire pressure. Simply looking a t the
tires will not tell you the pressure.
especially if you have radial tires -which may look properly inflated even if
they’re underinflated.
If your tires have valve caps, be sure to
put them back on. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
\
/
Tire Inspectionand
Rotation
To make your tires last longer, have them
inspected and rotated at the mileages
recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule. See “Scheduled Maintenance
Services” in the Index.
Use this rotation pattern.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust
the front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Certification/Tire label.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut
Torque” in the Index.
231
...
Service & Appearance Care
You need a new tire if
Tire Inspection and
Potation (CONT.)
When It’s Time for New Tires
)ne way to tell when it’s time for new
ires is to check the treadwear indicators,
vhich will appear when your tires have
mly 2/32 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread
emaining.
...232
You can see the indicators at three or
more places around the tire.
To find out what kind and sizeof tires you
leed, look at the Certification/Tire label.
You can see cord or fabric showing
through the tire’s rubber.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it
was new had a Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) number on each
:ire’s sidewall. Whenyou get new tires,
get ones with that sameTPC Spec
number. That way, your vehicle will
zontinue to have tires thatare designed to
give proper endurance, handling, speed
rating, traction, ride and other things
during normal service on your vehicle. If
your tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC number will be followed by a
“MS” (for mud and snow).
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut
or snagged deep enough to show cord
or fabric.
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Buying New Tires
0
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
0
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other
damage that can’t be repaired well
because of the size or location of the
damage.
If you ever replace your tires with those
not having a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range,
speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial)as your original
tires.
Uniform Tire Qua/ity
Grading
The following information relatesto the
system developed by the United States
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature
performance. (This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States.)
-
Treadwear
Temperature A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wearrate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and a half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s
resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
-
Traction A, B,C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are: A, B, and C. They represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on braking
(straight-ahead) traction tests and does
not include cornering (turning) traction.
Warning: The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
These grades are molded on the sidewalls
of passenger car tires.
233
. ..
Service & Appearance Care
-
Temperature A, B, C (CONT.)
Wheel Replacement
While the tires available as standard or
optional equipment on General Motors
vehicles may vary with respect to these
grades, all such tires meet General Motors
performance standards and have been
approved for use on General Motors
vehicles. All passenger type (P Metric)
tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or
badly rusted. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts should be replaced. If the wheel
leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum ,wheels, which can sometimes
be repaired). See your Pontiac dealer if
any of these conditions exist.
Wheel Alignment and
Balance
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel
Tire you need.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to
give you the longest tire life and best
overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to have
your wheels aligned again. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your
vehicle pulling one way or the other, the
alignment may need to be reset. If you
notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
234
Each new wheel should have the same
load carrying capacity, diameter, width,
offset, and be mounted the same way as
the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them
only with new GM original equipment
parts. This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts for your Pontiac Model.
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake
cooling, speedometer/odometer
calibration, headlight aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance,
and tire or tire chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
ked Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
Use tire chains only where legaland
only when you must. Use only SAE
Class “S” type chains thatare the
proper size for your tires. Install
them on the front tires and tighten
them as tightly as possible with the
ends securely fastened. Drive slowly
and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle,stop
and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down untilit stops.
Driving too fast with chains onwill
damage your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be
hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can
burst into flame if you strike a match or
get them on a hot part of the vehicle.
Some are dangerous if you breathe their
fumes in a closed space. When you use
anything from a container to clean your
Pontiac, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructidns.
And always open your doors or windows
when you’re cleaning the inside. See
“Appearance Care Chart” in the Index for
recommended products.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
0
Gasoline
0
Benzene
0
Naphtha
0
CarbonTetrachloride
0
Acetone
0
Paint Thinner
0
Turpentine
0
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous -- some more
than others -- and they can all damage
your vehicle, too.
235..
.
Service & Appearance Care
up stains as soon as you can -Appearance Care (CONI) D Clean
before they set.
NOTICE:
Don’t use any of these unless this
manual says you can. In many uses,
these will damage your vehicle:
Laundry Soap
Bleach
ReducingAgents
Alcohol
Cleaning the Insideof
Your Pontiac
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of
dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather
with a clean, damp cloth.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change
to a clean area often.A soft brush may
be used if stains are stubborn.
Use solvent-type cleaners in a
well-ventilated area only. If you use
them, don’t saturate the stained area.
If a ring forms after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it
will set.
Using Foam-Type Cleaner
on Fabric
236
As soon as you’ve cleaned the section,
use a sponge to remove the suds.
Rinse the section witha clean, wet
sponge.
Wipe off what’s left witha slightly
damp paper towel or cloth.
Then dry it immediately with a blow
dryer or a heat’ lamp.
NOTICE:
Be careful with a hair dryer or heat
lamp. You could scorch the fabric.
a Vacuum and brush the’area to remove
any loose dirt.
a Always clean a whole trim panel or
section. Mask surrounding trim along
stitch or welt lines.
Your Pontiac dealer has two GM cleaners,
a solvent-type spot lifter and a foam-type a Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner
powdered cleaner. They will clean normal
following the directions on the
spots and stains very well. Do not use
container label.
them on vinyl or leather.
a Use suds only and apply witha clean
Here are some cleaning tips:
sponge.
Always read the instructions on the
a Don’t saturate the material.
cleaner label.
.
Don’t rub it roughly.
Wipe with a clean cloth.
Using Solvent-Type
Cleaner on Fabric
First,see if youhavetousesolvent-type
cleaner at all. Some spots stains
and will clean
off better with just water and mild soap.
If you need to usea solvent:
Gently scrape excess soil from the
trim material witha clean, dull knife
or scraper. Use very little cleaner, lighl
pressure and clean cloths (preferably
cheesecloth). Cleaning shouldstart at
the outside of the stain, “feathering”
toward the center. Keep changingto a
clean section of the cloth.
0
When you clean a stain from fabric,
immediately dry the area with anair
hose, hair dryer, or heat lamp to help
prevent a cleaning ring. (See the
previous NOTICE.)
Special Cleaning
Problems
because the cleaner will dissolve them
and may cause them to spread.
Non-Greasy Stains
Cleaning Vinyl
Such as catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit,
fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit,
urine and blood.
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
e Carefully scrape off excess stain, then
sponge the soiled area with cool water.
0
If a stain remains, follow the
foam-type instructions described
earlier.
e If an odor lingers after cleaning
vomit or urine, treat the area with
a waterbaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon ( 5 ml) of baking soda to
1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.
Greasy or Oily Stains
Such as grease, oil, butter, margarine,
shoe polish, coffee with cream, chewing
gum, cosmetic creams, vegetable oils,
wax crayon, tar and asphalt.
0
If needed, clean lightly with
solvent-type cleaner.
Carefully scrape off excess stain.
0
0
Followthesolvent-typeinstructions
described earlier.
Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and
asphalt will stain if left on a vehicle
seat fabric. They should be removed
as soon as possible. Be careful,
If a stain remains, clean it with
solvent-type cleaner.
Combination Stains
Such as candy, ice cream, mayonnaise,
:hili sauce and unknown stains.
Carefully scrape off excess stain,
then clean with cool water and allow
to dry.
0
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to
remove dirt. You may have to do it
more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe
polish will stain if you don’t get them
off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a
solvent-type vinyl cleaner.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and
I mild soap or saddle soap.
For stubborn stains, use a mild
solution of 10% isopropyl alcohol
(rubbing alcohol) and 90% water.
Never use oils, varnishes,
solvent-based or abrasive cleaners,
furniture polish or shoe polish on
leather.
Soiled leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work
into finish, it can harm the leather.
237..
.
Service & Appearance Care
Cleaning the Top of the
Care of Safety Belts
lnstrurnent Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the
top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays
containing silicones or waxes may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and
even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Cleaning the Built-In Child
Restraint Pad
The built-in child restraint pad is attached
to the seat frame with fastener strips. You
can remove the pad and hand wash it with
mild soap and water.
.
.238
Keep belts clean and dry.
Glass
3ass should be cleaned often. GM Glass
Zleaner (GM Part No. 1050427) or a
liquid household glass cleanerwill
remove normal tobacco smoke and dust
Films.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass,
because they may cause scratches. Avoid
placing decals on the inside rear window,
since they may have to be scrapedoff
later. If abrasive cleanersare used on the
inside of the rear window, an electric
defogger element may be damaged. Any
temporary license should not be attached
across the defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outside
of the Windshield,
Backglass and Wiper
Blades
Cleaning the Outsideof Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of
Your Pontiac
The paint finish on your vehicle provides
beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and
durability.
If the windshield is not clear after using
the windshield washer, or if the wiper
Washing Your Vehicle
blade chatters when running, waxor other
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
material may be on the blade or
finish is to keep it clean by washing it
windshield.
often with lukewarm or cold water.
Clean the outside of the windshield with
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays
GM Windshield Cleaner, Bon-Ami
of the sun. Don’t use strong soaps or
Powder@(GM Part No. 1050011). The
chemical
detergents. Use liquid hand, dish
windshield is clean if beads do not form
or car washing (mild detergent) soaps.
when you rinse it with water.
Don’t use cleaning agents that contain
Clean the blade by wiping vigorously
acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
with a cloth soaked in full strength
should be flushed promptly and not
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the allowed to dry on the surface, or they
blade with water.
could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or a 100% cotton towel to
Wiper blades should be checked on a
avoid surface scratches and water
regular basis and replaced when worn.
spotting.
your Pontiac may be necessary to remove
residue from the paint finish. You can get
GM approved cleaning products from
your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and
Materials” in the Index.)
Your Pontiac has a “basecoat/clearcoat”
paint finish. The clearcoat gives more
depth and gloss to the colored basecoat.
Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or
aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
High pressure truck washes may cause
water to enter your vehicle.
239..
.
Service & Appearance Care
II Tires
Aluminum Wheels
Your Pontiac dealer has a GM White
(If So Equipped)
Sidewall Tire Cleaner. You can use a stiff
1m s h with the cleaner.
Your aluminum wheels have a protective
coating similar to the painted surface of
your Pontiac. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, chrome polish, abrasive
cleaners or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage this
coating. After rinsing thoroughly, a wax
may be applied.
When applying a tire dressing, always
care to wipe off any over spray or
!splash from painted surfaces. Petroleom1based products may damage the paint
1finish.
1
1rake
Weatherstrips
I
NOTICE:
If you have aluminum wheels, don’t
use an automatic vehicle wash that
has hard silicon carbide cleaning
brushes. These brushes can take off
the protective coating.
L
...240
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last longer, seal better, and not
stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease
with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather
more frequent application may be
required. (See “Recommended Fluids &
Lubricants” in the Index.)
Foreign Material
Calcium chloride and other salts, ice
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from industrial
chimneys, and other foreign matter can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Use cleaners
that are marked safe for painted surfaces
to remove foreign matter.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep
scratches in the finish should be repaired
right away.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired
with touch-up materials akailable from
your dealer or other service outlets.
Larger areasof finish damage can be
corrected in your dealer’s body and paint
shop.
rn Underbody
Maintenance
rn Collision rcepair
Your vehicle was built with composite
SMC (Sheet Molded Compound)
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal
fiberglass body panels and molded RIM
and dust control cancollect on the
(Reaction Injection Molded) front fenders
underbody. If these are not removed,
and bumper covers. These panels require
accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on
different collision repair procedures than
the underbody parts such as fuellines,
frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even metal-paneled vehicles. See your Pontiac
dealer for information on collision repair.
though they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody withplain
water. Clean any areas where mud and
other debris can collect. Dirt packed in
closed areas of the frame shouldbe
loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer or an underbody vehicle washing
system can do this for you.
Chemical Paint
Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions
can create a chemical fallout. Airborne
pollutants can fall upon and attack painted
surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy,
ringlet-shaped discolorations, and small
irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes
this, Pontiac will repair, at no charge to
the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles
damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km)
of purchase, whichever comes first.
241
...
Service & Appearance Care
Appearance Care and Maintenance Materials
You can get these from your Pontiac dealer.
Stops squeaks
1052349
I2 oz. (0.340kg)
Lubriplate (White Grease)
For hood, trunk, door hinges and latches
1051055
16 oz. (0.473L)
Preservatone
Vinyl Top Dressing
IO5 I398*
8 oz. (0.237L)
Spot Lifter
For cloth
1051515
32 oz. (0.946L)
Washer Solvent
Windshield-washing system
1052870
16 oz. (0.473L)
Wash-Wax (conc.)
* Not recommendedfor pigskin suede leather.
See Your General Motors Dealersfor These Products.
See Your Maintenance Schedule for Other Products.
Exterior Wash
Add-on Electrical
Equipment
NOTICE:
I Vehicle IdentiJication
Number (VIN)
Service Parts
Identification Label
rhis is the legal identifier for your
You’ll find this label inside the glove box
door. It’s very helpfulif you ever need to
’ontiac. It appears ona plate in the front
order parts. On this label is:
:orner of the instrument panel, on the
lriver’s side. You can see it if you look
hrough the windshield from outside your 0 your VIN,
rehicle. The VIN also appears on the
0 the model designation,
Jehicle Certification and Service Parts
0 paint information, and
abels and the certificates of title and
egistration.
0 a list of all production options and
special equipment.
Engine identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the
:ngine code. This codewill help you
dentify your engine, specifications, and
eplacement parts.
Be sure that this label is not removed
from the vehicle.
Don’t add anything electrical to
your Pontiac unless you check with
your dealer first. Some electrical
equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system..
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to your Pontiac see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac” in the
Index.
’:
Service & Appearance Care
To identify and check fuses, refer to the
Fuse panel, which is behind the lower
glove box door, and the fuse usage chart
later in this section.
A fuse puller is clipped inside the fuse
panel door. Place the wide end of the fuse
puller over the plastic end of thefuse.
Squeeze the ends over the fuse and pull it
out.
Fuses & Circuit
Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are
mtected from short circuits by a
:ombination of fuses, circuit breakers,
lnd fusible thermal links in the wiring
tself. This greatly reduces the chance of
'ires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band insidethc
fuse. If the band is broken or melted,
replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a
bad fuse with a new one of the correct
size.
BS
Position
CTSY
6 7
&
HORN
€33
STOP-HA2
RDO 2
Oa
R-WIPER
rn
F-WIPER
ELC
HORN
STOP
HAZ
F PUMP
AUX
TAIL
20
15
15
10
20
15
ECM
10
TURN
BKJ
GAGE
LPS
15
7.5
7.5
ABS
RD02
R/WIPER
F/WIPER
IGN
3
15
20
25
15
HTR A/C
RR BLWR
25
25
IGN
F-PUMP
AUX
Rating
(AMP.)
15
R-BLWR
Fuse Panel (3.I L V6)
Circuitry
Dome Lamm, Courtesv Lamps, Power Door Lock Switches, Glove Box
Lamp, Powkr'Mirrors,Power Sliding Delay Lock Module
Auto Level Control, Underhood Lamp
Horns, Horn Relay, Safety Belt Buzzer
Front/Rear Turn Lamps, Front Side Marker Lamps, Rear Stop Lamps,
Instrument Cluster Turn Indicator Lamps, Cruise Brake Switch
Fuel Pump, Oil Pressure Sender/Fuel Pump Switch
Radio, Front Cigar Lighter, Accessory Power Outlet
Front Park Lamps, Rear Tail Lamps, Front Side Marker Lamps, Licens
Plate Lamp, Radio, Heat/Vent/AC Control Head, Power Sliding Door
Throttle Body Fuel Injection, Fuel Pump Relay, Elec. Vac. Reg. Valve,
Elec. Control Module, Elec. Spark Control Module
Frontmear Turn Lamps, Front Side Marker Lamps, Cluster Turn Telltale,
Back-up Lamps
Cluster, Anti-Lock Brake System Lamp Module, Elec. Level Control Sensor
Cluster, Radio, Wiper Switch, Headlamp Switch, Rear Blower Switch,
Heat/Vent/AC Control Head, Door Switch Illumination, Front/Rear
Ashtray Illumination Bulbs
Anti-Lock Brake System
Radio
Rear Wipermasher Motors
Front Wipermasher Motor
A/C Compressor, A/C Solenoid Box, Compressor Relay, Temp. Door
Motor, Low Blower Relay; Heat/Vent/AV Control Head; Cruise Module;
Cooling Fan Relay; Rear Defogger Relay; Key Chime; Daytime
Running Lights Module; Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer and Generator
Charge Discrete, Transaxle Converter Clutch Switch
Front/Rear Blower Motors, High Blower Relay
Rear Blower, Rear Heat/Vent/AC
Service & Appearance Care
Position
CTSY
r&
RDO 2
p?a"r
R-WIPER
TURN BIU
prpl
GAGE
€33
PKS
F-WIPER
$
p-"11
INJ 3365
173
LPS
3
ELC
HORN
;TOP HAZ
20
:DO 1/AUX
TAIL
20
15
15
15
ABS
3
ECM
rURN B/U
10
15
GAGE
7.5
INJ
LPS
7.5
R-BLWR
Fuse Panel (3800 V6)
. . .246
Rating
(AMP.)
15
20
RD02
R/WIPER
F/WIPER
IGN
15
20
25
HTR A/C
RR BLWR
25
25
15
Circuitry
Dome Lamps, Courtesy Lamps, Power Door Lock Switches, Glove
Box Lamp, Power Mirrors, Power Sliding Delay Lock Module
Auto Level Control, Underhood Lamp
Horns, Horn Relay, Safety Belt Buzzer
Front/Rear Turn Lamps, Front Side Marker Lamps, Rear Stop Lamps,
Instrument Cluster Turn Indicator Lamps
Radio, Front Cigar Lighter, Accessory Power Outlet
Front Park Lamps, Rear Tail Lamps, Front Side Marker Lamps, License
Plate Lamp, Radio, Heat/Vent/AC Control Head, Power Sliding Door
Anti-Lock Brake System
Mass Air Flow Sensor, Electronic Control Module
Frontmear Turn Lamps,Front Side Marker Lamps, Cluster Turn
Telltale, Back-up Lamps
Cluster, Anti-Lock Brake System Lamp Module, Elec. Level
Control Sensor
Injector 3365 Fuse - Remote Location (See Page247)
Cluster, Radio, Wiper Switch, Headlamp Switch, Rear Blower Switch,
Heat/Vent/AC Control Head, Door Switch Illumination, Front/Rear
Ashtray Illumination Bulbs
Radio
Rear Wipermasher Motors
Front Wiper/Washer Motor
A/C Solenoid Box, Temp. Door Motor, Low Blower Relay;
Heat/Vent/AC Control Head; Cooling Fan Relay; Rear Defogger Relay;
Key Chime; Daytime Running Lights Module; Transaxle Converter
Clutch Solenoid and Generator Charge Discrete
Front/Rear Blower Motors, High Blower Relay
Rear Blower, Rear Heat/Vent/AC
P
Lh"
Circuit BreakevRelay Panel
Zircuit breakers and relaysare located in the circuit breaker/relay panel. This is
ocated behind the panel under theglove box, near the passenger's door.
Position
Rating
Circuitry
(AMP.)
1
2
15
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
30
30
30
Hazard Flasher
With 3800 V6 engine only: Canister Purge Solenoid,A/C
Clutch Control Relay, Cruise Control
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
Power Windows Circuit Breaker
Power Seat/Power Sliding Door Motor Circuit Breaker
Rear Defogger Circuit Breaker
Air Conditioning Blower Relay
Horn Relay
Chime Module
Defogger Timer Relay
.
Anti-Lock BrakeSystem
(ABS) Junction Block
Fuse
You'll find this fuse under the hood in
the ABS junction block, located next to
the remote positive jump starting
terminal.
To open the junction block, press in on
both sides of the cover.
247.
..
Service & Appearance Care
-
Headlight Wiring
The headlight wiring is protected by a
circuit breaker in the light switch. An
electrical overload will cause the lights to
go on and off, or in some cases to remain
off. -If thishappens, have your headlight
system checked right away.
Windshield Wipers
lnjector 3365 Fuse
'3800 V6 ENGINE ONLY)
1'his 20-amp fuse is located underhood,
0In a bracket just behind the passenger
S ide headlight. It is mounted on the face
0If the bracket in the position closest to thl
Plassenger side of the vehicle. The fuse
Siervices the injectors, fuel pump, oil
Plressure sender and fuel pdmp'switch.
7'0 access the fuse, pry back the latch wit1
a screwdriver, then pull down on'the base
0If the unit. If you need to replace the
f use, be sure to use a 20-amp fuse.
F'ush the base of the unit firmly up into
tlhe cover until the latch snaps into the
1(xked position.
248
The windshield wiper motor is protected
by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the
motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc.,
the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some
electrical problem, have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers in the circuit
breaker/relay panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories.
When the current load is too heavy, the
Zircuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is
fixed.
Capacities and Specifications
EngineCrankcase (All Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When changing filter, up to quart (I12 liter) more oil may be needed.
Automatic Transaxle
When draining or replacing torque converter, morefluid may be needed.
3-Speed:
Pan Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AfterCompleteOverhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-Speed:
Pan Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After CompleteOverhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System
3.1L V6 Engine:
With
Heater
Only
............................................
With
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
With Rear Heater (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3800 V6 Engine:
Air
With
Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
With Rear Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
With Rear Heater (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refrigerant,AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same. I f the air conditioning
system in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be
sure the proper refrigerant is
used. If you’re not sure, ask your Pon.tiac dealer.
FuelTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 quarts
3.80 L
I
12
12
4 quarts
7 quarts
3.80 L
6.60 L
6 quaits
8 quarts
5.70 L
4.70 L
quarts
quarts
14 quarts
11.50 L
12.00 L
13.25 L
quarts
10.75 L
13 quarts
12.25 L
13 quarts
12.25 L
See refrigerant charge labelunder hood.
11
20 gallons
76.00 L
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual.
249..
.
Service & Appearance Care
Capacities and Specifications(CONT.)
Power Steering
3.1L V6 Engine:
PumpOnly ...............................................
0.50 L
..
1 pint
Complete System ..........................................
0.60 L
..
1 1/4 pint
3800 V6 Engine:
PumpOnly .................................................
1 pint
0.50 L
Complete System ............................................
1 1/2 pint
0.70 L
Tire Pressures, Sizes ...........................................
See Certification/Tiri=label on driver’s door.
Wheel NutTorque .............................................
100 pound-feet (140 Nmm)
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual.
..250
Engine Specifications
3.1L V 4 ENGINE
3800 V6 ENGINE
D ................................
L
Type ...............................
V6 ...............................
V6
........................
3.1 Liters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 Liters
....................
8.5: 1 .............................
9.0: 1
VINEngineCode
Displacement
.....................
Compression Ratio
Firing Order
.........................
ThermostatTemperature Specification
....
1-2-3-4-5-6
........................
195"F (9 1"C) ......................
1-6-5-4-3-2
195°F (91"C)
I
Normal Maintenance Replacemenf Parts
AirCleanerElement
...................
AC Type A-773C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Type A-974C
EngineOil Filter. .....................
ACType PF-51 .....................
AC Type PF-47
PCVValve ..........................
AC Type CV-789C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Type CV-892C
AC Type oR43TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gap: 0.045 inch
AC Type 4 1-600
Gap: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm)
DL 20 16 ..........................
DL 2016
Spark
Plugs
.........................
RemoteLockControlBatteries
(2) . . . . . . .
251
...
Service & Appearance Care
Replacement Bulbs
BULB
OUTSIDE LIGHTS
Back-up Lights
................................................
..................................
License PlateLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Parkingnurn Signal Lights
Halogen Headlights
Outer .......................................................
Inner .......................................................
Front Side Marker Lights
.........................................
Stop/Tail/Turn Signal Lights
Upper 2 Positions .............................................
Lower 2 Positions .............................................
UnderhoodLight
...............................................
3057
3057NA
194
9006
9005
194NA
194
2057
561
Replacement Bulbs (COMT.)
INSIDE LIGHTS
Courtesy Lights
CargoArea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
562
Sliding Door Stepwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FrontFloor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
562
194
Reading Light(s)
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
562
906
Dome Light(s)
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
561
561
Glove Compartment Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
194
IndicatorLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
Turn Signal Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
253
..
Notes
.
254
I
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGE AS
RECOMMENDED
Part 7
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
T h i s part covers the maintenance
A Word About Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..........
. . 256
required for your Pontiac. Your vehicle
Your Vehicle and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
needs these servicesto retain its
How This Part is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 256
safety. dependabilityand emission
A . Scheduled Maintenance Services
control performance.
Using Your Maintenance Schedules . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Selecting the
Right Schedule . . . . .
Schedule1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258-259
. . . . . . . . . . . . 260-261
Schedule11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services . .
B Owner Inspections & Services
AtEachFuelFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
264
Have you purchased the
At Least Once a Month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
265
GM Protection Plan?
At
Least
Once
a
Year
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
265-267
The Plan supplements your
C Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
267-268
new vehicle warranties.
See your Chevrolet dealer for details
. D Recommended Fluids & Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268-270
E Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-272
.
.
.
.
255
..
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
A Word About Maintenance
We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good
working condition. But we don’t know exactly how you’ll drive
it. You may drive very short distances only a few times a week.
Or you may drive long distances all the timein very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you
may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways.
How This Part is Organized
The remainder of this part is divided intofive sections:
“Section A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows what to
have done and how often. Some of these services can be
complex, so unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should let your dealer’s service
department or another qualified service centerdo these jobs.
Because of all the different ways people use their GM vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. You may even need more frequent
checks and replacements than you will find in the schedules in
this part. So please read this part and note how you drive. If
you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your Pontiac dealer, the place many GM owners
choose to have their maintenance work done. Your dealer can
be relied upon to use proper parts and practices.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle
in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All
recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper
vehicle maintenance or the removal of important components
can significantly affect the quality of the air we breathe.
Improper fluid levels or even the wrong tire inflation can
increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help
protect our environment, and to help keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
If you are skilled enough todo some work on your vehicle, you
will probably want to get the service information GM
publishes. You will find a list of publications and how to get
them in this manual. See “Service Publications’.’in the Index.
“Section B: Owner Checks and Services” tellsyou what should
be checked whenever you stop for fuel.It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehiclein good condition.
“Section C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your Pontiac dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center should perform.
“Section D: Recommended Fluids andLubricants” lists some
products GM recommends to help keep your vehicle properly
maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be
used whether youdo the work yourself or have it done.
“Section E: Maintenance’ Record” providesa place for you to
record the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Whenever
any maintenance is performed, be sure to write it down in this
section. This will help you determinewhen your next
maintenance should be done. In addition, it is a good idea to
keep your maintenance receipts. They may be needed
to
qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.
Section A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedulethem. Your Pontiac
dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with
it. If you go to your dealer for yourservice needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will pkrform the
work using genuine GM parts.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits.
You will find these limitson your vehicle’s
Certificationrnire label. See “LoadingYour Vehicle” in the
Index.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving
limits.
use the recommended unleaded fuel. See “Fuel” in the
Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is right
for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which schedule to
follow:
Schedule I
Is any one of these true for your vehicle?
Most trips are less than 4 miles (6 km).
0
Most trips are less than 10 miles (16 km) when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
The engine is at low speed most of the time (as in
door-to-door delivery, or in stop-and-go traffic).
0
You operate your vehicledusty
in
areas.
.-
.‘i.
..I
,
You tow a trailer.
If any one (or more) of these is true for your driving, follow
Schedule I.
Schedule I1
Follow Schedule I1 only if none of the above conditions is true.
257.
..
Maintenance Schedule
Scheduled Maintenance Services ScheduleI
Follow Schedule I if your car is MAINLY driven under one or more of the following conditions:
0
0
0
0
0
When most trips are less than 4 miles (6 kilometers).
When most trips are less than 10 miles ( 16 kilometers) and outside temperatures remain below freezing.
When most trips include extended idling and/or frequent low-speed operation as in stop-and-go traffic.
Towing a trailer.”?‘
When operating in dusty areas.
Schedule I should also be followed if the car is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial applications.
WHAT TO SERVICE
(See “Explanation of
Scheduled Maintenance
Services” following
Schedules I and 11)
WHEN TO PERFORM
Miles (kilometers) or
Months, Whichever
Occurs First
Item No.
I . Engine Oil & Filter
Change“
Every 3,000 mi. (5000 km) or
3 months
2. Chassis Lubrication
Every 3,000 mi. (5000 km) or
12 months
3. Tire & Wheel Rotation
& Inspection
At 6,000 mi. (10 000 km) and
every 15,000 mi. (25 000 km)
or as necessary
4.Engine Accessory Drive
Every 60,000 mi.
(100 000 km) or60 months.
Belt Inspection
5. Cooling System
Service”
Every 30,000 mi. (50 000 km)
or 24 months.
6. Transaxle Service
See “Explanation of Scheduled
Maintenance Services”
following Schedules I and I1
.258
MILES (000)
.
.
1
KILOMETERS (000)
I
WHAT TO SERVICE
I
r-
MILES (000)
The services shownin this schedule up to 48,000 miles (80 000 km) should be Derformed after 48,000 miles at the same intervals.
An Emission Control Service.
The US. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined t h n t the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liobilily prior to the compleiion o f vehicle useful life. General Motors. however. urges that a11 recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded i n "Section E:Maintenance Record".
259.
.
Maintenance Schedule
Scheduled Maintenance Services ScheduleI1
Follow Schedule I1 ONLY if none of the driving conditions specified in Schedule I apply.
WHAT TO SERVICE
(See ‘,‘Explanationof
Scheduled Maintenance
Services’’ following
Schedules I and 11)
Item No.
1. Engine Oil & Filter Change*
Oil Filter Change*
WHEN TO PERFORM
Miles (kilometers) or
Months, Whichever
Occurs First
Every 7,500 mi. (12 500 km) or
12 months
MlLES (000)
KILOMETERS (000)
87.5
75
0
100
0
0
0
At first and then every other oil change
2. Chassis Lubrication
Every 7,500 mi. (12 500 km) or 12
months
3. Tire & Wheel Rotation & Inspection
At 7,500 mi. (12 500 km) and then every
15,000 mi. (25 000 k m ) or as necessary
4.Engine Accessory Drive Belt
Every 60,000 mi. (100 000 km) or
60 months
0
5. Cooling System Service”
Every 30,000 mi. (50 000 km) or
24 months
0
6 . Transaxle Service
See “Explanation of Scheduled
Maintenance Services” following
Schedules I and I1
Inspection
0
0
0
0
WHAT TO SERVICE
(See Explanation of
Scheduled Maintenance
Services Following
Schedules I and 11)
Item No.
7. Spark Plug Replacement*
WHEN TO PERFORM
Miles (kilometers) or
Months, Whichever
Occurs First
Every 30,000 mi. (50 000 km)
MILES (000)
KILOMETERS (000)
12.5
25
37.5
50
62.5
75
87.5
100
0
0
~
8. Spark Plug Wire Inspection*
9. EGR System Inspection
(3.1L Code D engine only)*?
10.Air Cleaner Filter Replacement”
1 1. Air Cleaner Inspection
(3.1L Code D engine only)*f‘
12. Fuel Tank, Cap& Lines Inspection*?
13.Engine Timing and Distributor Check
(3.1L Code D engine only)*?
0
Every 60,000 mi.(100 000 km) or
60 months
0
See “Explanation of Scheduled
Maintenance Services” following
Schedules I and I1
Every 30,000 mi. (50 000 km)
Every 60,000 mi. ( 100 000 km) or
60 months
~~
0
0
0
0
0
0
.
1
The services shown in this schedule upto 60,000 miles (100 000 km) should be performed after 60,000 miles at the same
intervals.
*
An Emission Control Service.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liabilily prior to the completion of vehicle useful life. General Motors. however, urges that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded in “Section E:Maintenance Record”.
261
...
Maintenance Schedule
Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Following are explanations of the services listed in Schedule I
and Schedule 11.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Section D.
Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All parts
should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or
anyone else drives the vehicle.
NOTE: To determine your engine’s displacement and code, see
“Engine Identification” in the Index.
1. Engine Oil and Filter Change* -- Always use SG or SH
Energy Conserving I1 oils of proper viscosity. The “SH” or
“SG” designation may be shown alone or in combination
with others, such as “SH/CD”, “SH, SG, CD”, “SG/CD”,
etc.
2. Chassis Lubrication -- Lubricate suspension and steering
linkage. Lubricate the Transaxle shift linkage, and parking
brake cable guides, underbody contact points and linkage.
3. Tire and Wheel Rotation and Inspection -- For proper
wear and maximum tire life, rotate your tiresfollowing the
instructions in this manual. See “Tires, Inspection &
Rotation” in the Index. Check the tires for uneven wear or
damage. If you see irregular or premature wear, check the
wheel alignment. Check for damaged wheels also.
4. Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection -- Inspect the
drive belt for cracks, fraying, wear and proper tension.
Replace as needed.
5. Cooling System Service* -- Drain, flush and refill the
system with new or approved recycled coolant conforming
to GM Specification 1825M. Keep coolant at the proper
mixture as specified. See “Coolant” in the Index. This
provides proper freeze and boil protection, corrosion
inhibitor level and maintains properengine operating
temperature.
Inspect hoses and replace if they are cracked, swollen or
deteriorated. Tighten screw-type hose clamps. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. Wash
the pressure cap and neck.
To help ensure proper operation, we recommend a pressure
test of both the cooling system and the pressurecap.
*
An Emission Control Service.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of vehicle useful life. General Motors, however, urges that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded in “Section E:Maintenance Record”.
...262
.. :
.
2
“
- c
$$
6. Transaxle Service -- Change both the fluid and filter every
15,000 miles (25 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or moreof these conditions:
0
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
0
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0
When doing frequent trailer towing. (With some
models, you shouldn’t ever tow a trailer. See “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.)
0
Uses such as found in taxi, police car or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change boththe fluid and filter every 100,000
miles ( 166 000 km).
7. Spark Plug Replacement” -- Replace spark plugs with the
proper type. See “Replacement Parts” in the Index.
8. Spark Plug Wire Inspectioa” -- Inspect for burns, cracks
or other damage, Check the bootfit at the distributor or
coils and at the spark plugs. Replace wiresas needed.
9. Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System InSpption
(3.1L Code D engine only)*? -- Conduct the EGR
system
,*!
service as described in the service manual. To purchase a
service manual, see “Service Publications’’ in tfihndex.
‘1
10. Air Cleaner Filter Replacement” -- Replace every
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or more often under dusty
conditions. Ask your dealer for the proper replacement
intervals for your driving conditions.
11. Air Cleaner Inspection (3.1L Code D engineonly)*? -Inspect all hoses and ducts for proper hookup. Make sure
the valve works properly.
12.Fuel Tank, Cap andLines Inspection*? -- Inspec‘t .fuel
tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel ‘cap
gasket for aneven filler neck imprint or any damage.
Replace parts as needed. Periodic replacement of the fuel
filter is not required.
13.Engine Timing and Distributor Check (3.1L Code,D
engine only)*? -- Adjust the timing to the underhoqd label
specifications. Inspect the inside and outside of the
distributor cap and rotor for cracks, carbon tracking and
corrosion. Clean or replace as needed.
C
Maintenance Schedule
Section B: Owner Checksand
Services
Listed below are owner checks and services which should be
performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever
any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure
they are the proper ones, as shown in Section D.
At Each Fuel Fill (Itis important foryou or
a service station attendant
to perform these
underhood checksat each fuel fill.)
CHECK OR
SERVICE
Engine Oil Level
WHAT TO DO
-
Check the engine oil level and add the
properoil if necessary.See“Engine
Oil” in the Index for further details.
Engine Coolant
Level
Check the engine coolant level and add
the proper coolantmix if necessary. See
“Coolant”intheIndex
for further
details.
Windshield
Washer Fluid
Level
Checkthewindshieldwasherfluid
level in the windshield washer tank and
add the proper fluid if necessary. See
“Windshield
Washer
Fluid”
in
the
Index for further details.
1 At Least Once a Month
CHECK OR
SERVICE
Tire Inflation
Cassette Deck
At Least Once a Year
WHAT TO DO
‘Check tireinflation. Make sure they are
inflated to the pressures specified on the
Certificationnire label located on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. See
“Tires”’ in the Indexfor further details.
‘CHECKOR
SERVICE
Key Lock
Cylinders
Body Lubrication
Cleancassettedeck. Cleaning should
be done every15hours oftapeplay. See
“Audio Systems” in theIndex
for
further ‘details.
WHAT TO DO
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with
the lubricant specified in Section D.
Lubricate all body door hinges,
including the liftgate. Also lubricate all
hinges and latches, including those for
the hood, sliding door track, rear
compartment, glove box door and any
folding seat hardware. Section D tells
you what to use.
g r t e r Switch
1. Before you start, be sure you have
enough room around the vehicle.
I
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake
(see “Parking Brake” in the index if
necessary) and the regular brake.
.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear.
The starter should work only in “P”
(Park) or “ N ’ (Neutral). If the starter
worksinany
other position, your
vehicle needs service.
265
...
Maintenance Schedule
CHECKOR
SERVICE
Steering Column
Lock
I
WHAT TO DO
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the key to “LOCK”
in each shift lever position.
0
I
The key should turn to “LOCK”
only when the shift lever is in “P”
(Park).
CHECK OR
SERVICE
Parking Brake and
Automatic
Transaxle “P”
(Park) Mechanism
Check
WHAT TO DO
The key should come out only in
“LOCK.”
0
To check the parking brake:
With the
engine running and transmission in
“N’ (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressurefromtheregularbrake
pedal. Do thisuntilthevehicle
is
held by the parking brake only.
0
To check the“P” (Park) mechanism’s
holding ability: Shift to “P” (Park).
Then release all brakes.
CHECK OR
SERVICE
Underbody
Flushing
I
WHAT TO DO
At least everyspring, use plain water to
flush any corrosive materials from the
underbody.
Take
care to clean
thoroughlyany areas where mudand
other debris cancollect.
Section C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed below are inspections and services which should be
performed at least twicea year (for instance, each spring and
fall). You should let your GM dealer’s service department or
other qualified service center dothese jobs. Make sure any
necessary repairs are completed at once.
I
CHECK OR
SERVICE
Restraint Systems
CHECK OR
SERVICE
Steering,
Suspension and
Front-WheelDrive Axle Boot
and Seal
Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension
and steering system for damaged, loose
or missing parts, signs of wear, or lack
of lubrication. Inspect the power
steering lines andhoses
for proper
hookup, binding, leaks,
cracks,
chafing, etc.Clean and then inspect the
drive axle boot seals for damage, tears
or leakage. Replace seals if necessary.
Exhaust System
Inspection
Inspectthecomplete
exhaust system.
Inspect
the
body
near
the exhaust
system.Lookforbroken,damaged,
missing or out-of-position partsas well
as open seams, holes,
loose connections,
or other conditions which could
cause a
let
heat build-upin the floor pan or could
exhaust fumes intothevehicle.
See
“Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Throttle Linkage
[nspection
Inspect the throttle linkage
for
interference or binding, and for
damaged ormissing
parts. Replace
parts as needed.
WHAT TO DO
Now and then, makesure all your belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors,
anchorages and reminder systems are
working properly. Look for any loose
parts or damage. If you see anything
that might keep a restraint system from
doing itsjob, have it repaired.
WHAT TO DO
Maintenance Schedule
CHECK OR
SERVICE
Brake System
[nspection
Section D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
WHAT TO DO
inspect thecomplete system. Inspect
brake lines and hoses for proper
hookup, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for
wear and rotors for surface condition.
Also inspect drum brake linings for
wear and cracks. Inspect other brake
parts, including drums, wheel
cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment. You
may need to have your brakes inspected
more often if your driving habits or
conditions result in frequent braking.
NOTE:A low brake fluid level can
indicate worn disc brake pads which
may need to be serviced, Also, if the
brake system warning light stays on or
comes on, something maybe wrong
with thebrake system. See “Brake
System Warning Light” in the Index. If
your anti-lock brake system warning
light stays on, comes on or flashes,
something may be wrong with the
anti-lock brake system. See “Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning Light” in the
Index.
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your GM dealer.
USAGE
Engine Oil
FLUIDlLUBRICANT
API service SH or SG
Energy
Conserving I1 oils of
the
proper
viscosity. The “SG” or “SH”
designation may be shown alone or in
combination
with
others, such as
“SH/CD,” “SG/CD” or “SH,SG,CD,”
etc. To determine the
preferred
viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of water (preferably
distilled) andgood quality ethylene
glycol base antifreeze (GMPart No.
1052753 or equivalent) conforming to
GM Specification 1825M or approved
recycled coolant conforming to GM
Specification 1825M.
Hydraulic Brake
System
Delco Supreme 1l@Brake Fluid (GM
Part No. 1052535or equivalent DOT-3
brake fluid).
~~
-
~.
-
USAGE
Parking Brake
Guides
Power Steering
System
Automatic
Transaxle
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Chassis lubricant (GM Part No.
1052497or equivalent) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI Grade
2, Category LB or GC-LB.
GM Hydraulic Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884 or equivalent).
Lubricate
with
Multi-Purpose
Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345120), or
synthetic SAE 5W-30 engine oil.
Automatic
Transaxle Shift
Linkage
Engine oil.
Chassis
Chassis lubricant (GM Part
No.
Lubrication1052497or
equivalent) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI Grade
2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Windshield
Washer Solvent
a. Pivots and
Spring Anchor
a. Engine oil.
b. Release Pawl
b. Chassis lubricant (GM Part No.
1052497 or equivalent) orlubricant
meeting requirements NLGI
of
Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB.
DEXRON@-111 or DEXRON@-IIE
Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
GM Optikleen@Washer Solvent (GM
Part No. 1051515) or equivalent.
FLUID/LUBRICANT
USAGE
Hood Latch
Assembly
Hood and Door
Hinges, Liftgate
Hinge and
Linkage, Fuel
Door Hinge,
Folding Seat
Hardware, Rear
Compartment Lid
Hinges
Engine oil or Lubriplate Lubricant (GM
Part No. 1050109).
Sliding Door Track LubriplateLubricantaerosol(GMPart
No. 1052349) or equivalent white grease.
Weatherstrips
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
No. 12345579 or equivalent).
See “Replacement Parts” in the Index for recommended
replacement filters, valves and spark plugs.
269.
..
Maintenance Schedule
Section E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date,
odometer reading and who performed the service in the
columns indicated. When completing the Maintenance
Performed column, insert the numbers from the ScheduleI or
Schedule I1 maintenance charts which correspond to the
maintenance performed. Also, you should retain all
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio is a
convenient place to store them.
I
Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
DATE MAINTENANCE
SERVICED BY
READING PERFORMED
. L
.
270
.~
.
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
271
...
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Record
J
ODOMETER
READING
DATE
.
.
-..
.-
...272
BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED SERVICED
U
1
L
L
H e r e you will find out howto contact
Pontiac if you need assistance. This
part also tells you how
to obtain
service publicationsand how to repori
any safety defects.
Part 8
Customer Assistance Information
Part 8 includes
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
274
Customer Assistance for the Hearing or Speech Impaired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
BBB AUTO LINE-Alternative Dispute Resolution Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
277
Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
278
Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
279
273
...
Customer Assistance Information
t-J
I'
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and Pontiac.
Normally, any concern with the sales
transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer's
Sales or Service Departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned,
misunderstandings can occur. If your
concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be
taken:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with
a member of dealership management.
Normally, concerns can be quickly
resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the Sales,
Service, or Parts Manager, contact the
owner of the dealership or the General
Manager.
STEP TWO-- If after contacting a
member of dealership management, it
appears your concern cannot be resolved
by the dealership without further help,
contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-PM CARES. In
Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer
Assistance Center in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
In Mexico, call (525) 254-3777. In Puerto
Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, call
1-809-763- 1315. In all other overseas
locations, contact GM North American
Export Sales in Canada by calling
1-905-644-41 12.
For prompt assistance, please have the
following information available to give
the Customer Assistance Representative:
0
Your name, address, home and
business telephone number
Vehicle Identification Number (This is
available from the vehicle registration
or title, or the plate above the left top
of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership nameandlocation
0
Vehicle delivery date and present
mileage
0
Natureofconcern
We encourage you to call the toll free
number listed previously in order to give
your inquiry prompt attention. However,
if you wish to write Pontiac, write to:
United States
Pontiac Division
Customer Assistance Center
One Pontiac Plaza
Pontiac, MI 48340-2952
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, OntarioL 1H 8P7
When contacting Pontiac, please
remember that your concern will likelybe
resolved in the dealership, using the
dealership's facilities, equipment and
personnel. That is why we suggest you
follow Step One firstif you have a
concern.
Customer Assistance
for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
(TDD)
GM Participation in
BBB AUTO LINE Alternative Dispute
Resolution Program"
To assist owners who have hearing
difficulties, Pontiac has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the
Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any hearing or speech
impaired customer who has access to a
TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) can communicate with Pontiac by
dialing: 1-800-TDD-PONT (TDD users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
*This program may not be available in all
states, depending on state law. Canadian
owners refer to your Warrantyand Owner
Assistance information booklet. General
Motors reserves the right to change
eligibility limitations and/or to
discontinue its participation in this
program.
Both Pontiac and your Pontiac dealer are
committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. Our experience has shown that, if
a situation arises where you feel your
concern has not been adequately
addressed, the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure described earlier in this section
is very successful.
275..
.
Customer Assistance Information
If you are not satisfied after following the
GM Participation in
Customer Satisfaction Procedure, you
BBB AUTO LINE may contact the BBB using the toll-free
telephone number, or write them atthe
Alternative Dispute
‘-llowing address:
Resolution Program*
BBB AUTO LINE
(CONI)
There may be instances where an
impartial third-party can assist in arriving
at a solution to a disagreement regarding
vehicle repairs or interpretation of the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist
in resolving these disagreements Pontiac
voluntarily participates in BBB AUTO
LINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court
program administered by the Better
Business Bureau system to settle disputes
between customers and automobile
manufacturers. This program is available
free of charge to customers who currently
own orlease a GM vehicle.
.276
Council of Better Business Bureaus
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
We prefer you utilize the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure before you resort
to AUTO LINE, but you may contact the
BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt
to resolve the complaint serving as an
intermediary between you and Pontiac.If
this mediation is unsuccessful, an
informal hearing will be scheduled where
zligible customersmay present their case
to an impartial third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make a decision which
you may accept or reject.If you accept
To file a claim, you will be askedto
the decision, GM will be bound by that
provide your name and address, your
decision. The entire dispute resolution
vehicle identification number (VIN), and procedure should ordinarily take about
a statement of the nature of your
Forty days from the time you file
a ,claim
complaint. Eligibility is limited by vehicle until a decision is made.
age and mileage, and other factors.
Some state lawsmay require you to use
this program before filinga claim with a
state-run arbitration program orin the
courts. For further information, contact
the BBB at 1-800-955-5100 or the
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-PM-CARES.
REPURTZNG SAFETY
DEFECTS TO THE
UNZTED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could causea crash or could
cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and
if it finds
that a safety defect exists ina group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or General
Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call
the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA
U.S. Department of Transportatior,
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from the
Hotline.
REPORTZNG SAFETY
DEFECTS TO THE
CANADIAN
GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe
that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should immediately notify Transport
Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may
write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario K1G 352
Customer Assistance Information
w REPORTZNG SAFETY
DEFECTS TO
GENERAL MOTORS
We take anxiety out of uncertain
situations by providing minor repair
information over the phone or making
arrangements to tow your vehicle to the
nearest Pontiac dealer.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
Transport Canada) in a situation like this,
we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please
call us at 1-800-PM-CARES , or write:
Pontiac Division
Customer Assistance Center
One Pontiac Plaza
Pontiac, MI 48340-2950
In Canada, please call us at
1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Center, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario LlH 8P7
.
278
Pontiac’s Roadside Assistancetoll-free
number is staffedby a team of trained
technical advisors who are available 24
hours a day, 365 daysa year.
Pontiac Roadside
Assistance Program
Security While You Travel
1-800-ROADSIDE 1-800-762-3743
As the proud owner of a new Pontiac
vehicle, you are automatically enrolled in
the Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program
This value-added service is intended to
provide you with peace of mind as you
drive in the city or travel the open road.
We will provide the following services for
3 years/36,000 miles, atno expense to
you:
Vehicle out of fuel
Keys locked in vehicle
Tow to nearest dealer for warranty
Change a flat tire
Jump starts
We have quick, easyaccess to telephone
numbers of the following services
depending on your needs:
0
Hotels
Glassreplacement
Rental vehicles or taxis
0
Police, fire department or hospitals
In many instances, mechanical failures
are covered under Pontiac’s
comprehensive warranty. However when
other outside services are utilized, our
advisors will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficientassistance when
calling, please have the following
information available to give the advisor:
0
Location of vehicle
Telephone number of your location
0
Vehicle model, year, and color
Mileage of vehicle
0
Vehicleidentificationnumber
Vehiclelicenseplatenumber
Pontiac reserves the right to limit services
or reimbursement to an owner or driver
when in Pontiac’s judgement the claims
become obsessive in frequency or type of
occurrence.
While we hope that you never have the
occasion to use our service, it is added
security while traveling for you and your
family. Remember, we’re only a phone
call away. Pontiac Roadside
Assistance-1 -800-ROADSIDE or
1-800-762-3743.
Canadian Roadside
Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an
extensive Roadside Assistance Program
accessible from anywhere in Canada or
the U.S.A. Please refer to the separate
brochure provided by the dealer orcall
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
Please consult your dealer for details.In
Canada, please consult your GM Dealer
for information on courtesy
transportation.
Service Publications
Information on how to obtain Product
Service Publicationsand Indexes as
described below is applicable only in the
fifty U.S. states (and the District of
Columbia) and only for cars and light
trucks with GVWR less than 10,OOQ
pounds (4 536 kg).
In Canada, information pertaining to
Product Service Bulletins and Indexes can
be obtained by writing to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Service PublicationsDepartment
1908 Colonel Sam Dr.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Pontiac regularly sends its dealers useful
service bulletins about Pontiac products.
Pontiac Courtesy
Pontiac monitors product performance in
Transportation
the field. We then prepare bulletins for
For warranty repairs during the BUMPER servicing our products better. Now, you
TO BUMPER coverage period, interim
can get these bulletins too.
transportation may be available under the
Pontiac Courtesy Transportation Program.
279
Customer Assistance Information
Service Publications
(CONT.)
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some
pertain to the proper use and care of your
vehicle. Some describe costly repairs.
Others describe inexpensive repairs
which, if done on time with the ’latest
parts, may avoid future costly repairs.
Some bulletins tell a technician how to
repair a new or unexpected condition.
Others describe a quicker way to fix your
tehicle. They can help a technician
service your vehicle better.
Most bulletins apply to conditions
affecting a small number of cars or trucks.
Your Pontiac dealer or a qualified
technician may have to determine if a
specific bulletin applies to your vehicle.
you’ll find in the index and how you can Some PSP’s pertaining toa particular
model year vehicle may be publishedin
get one:
later years, and these would be listed in
the later year’s index. When you order an
What You’ll Find in the
index for a model year that is not over
Index:
yet, we’ll send you the most recently
0 A list of all PSP’s published by
published issue. Check the ordering form
Pontiac in a model year (1990 or
for indexes for earlier model years.
later). PSP’s covering all models of
Pontiac vehicles are listed in the same Cut out the ordering form, fill it out, and
mail it in. We will then see to it that an
index.
index is mailed to you. There is no charge
0 Ordering information so you can buy
for indexes for the 1990- 1994 model
the specific PSP’s you may want.
years.
0
Price information for the PSP’s you
may want to buy.
How You Can Get an
Index:
Indexes are published periodically. Most
of the PSP’s which could potentially
Individual PSP’s
apply to the most recent Pontiac models
If you don’t want to buy all the PSP’s
will be listed in the most recent
issued by Pontiac for all models in the
publication for that model year. This
model year, you can buy individual PSP’s, means you may want to wait until the end
such as those which may pertain to a
of the model year before ordering an
particular model. To do this, you will first index, if you are interested in buying
need to see our index of PSP’s. It provides PSP’s pertaining to a current model year
a variety of information. Here’s what
car or truck.
...280
Toll-Free Telephone
Number
If you wantan additional ordering form
for an index, just call toll-free and we’ll
be happy to sendyou one. Automated
recording equipment will take your name
and mailing address.The number to call
is 1-800-551-4123.
A VERY IMPORTANT REMINDER:
These PSP’s are meant for technicians.
They are not meant for the
“do-it-yourselfer.” Technicians have the
equipment, tools, safety instructions, and
know-how to do a job quickly and safely.
Pontr'ac Service
Publications
You can get these by using the order
form: Pontiac Division Service Manuals
are intended for use by professional,
qualified technicians. Attemptingrepairs
or service without the appropriate
training, tools, and equipment couldcause
injury to you or others and damageto
your vehicle that may cause it not to
operate properly.
...282
1994 PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications
cowring the operationand servicing of pur vehicle can be purchasedby filling outthe Service Publications Order Form
in this book and mailing it with your check, money orderor credit card information to Helm, Incorporated(address listedbelow).
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1994 PONTIAC TRANS SPORT
PRODUCT SERVfCE PUBLICATIONS
SERVfCE MANUALS
Product Service Publications (PSP’s), are bulletins, letters and articles
Service Manuals have the diagnosis, repair and overhaul
information
published for trained dealer service personnel. See Service Publicaon engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steertions listed previouslyin this section.
ing, body, etc.
A cumulative index is published quarterly during the current model
Model
Form
Number
Price
in the modelyear.
year. The indexes
list all PSP’s published by Pontiac
1994 Pontiac Trans Sport . . . . . . . . . . . . S-9410-U
TBA”
PSP Index
NOTE: Please specify special bodyor engine types on order form.
Write information in the Form Number column.For example: Turbo,
Year
Convertible.
1994 pspI-94-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Free
‘Price to be announced at a tabr date. Call 1-800-782-4356for furtherinformation.
1993 pspI-93-p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Free
1992
psP1-92-P
...............................
Free
OWNER’S INFORMATION
1991 pspI-91-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Free
Owner publications are written directly for Owners
intended
and to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The Owner’s
PSP Bound BulletinBook (Complete Year Bulletins)
Manual includesthe Maintenance Schedule forall models.
mber
Form
Description
Year
1992 All PSP’S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-92-PSP-4
15.00
1994 Pontiac Trans Sport Owner’s Manual
1991 All’PSP’s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-91-PSP-4
In Portfolio: Includes&rtfolio, Owner‘s Manualand Warranty Booklet.
15.00
1994PontiacTrans
SportIn-Portfolio . . . . . . ..lo260058 $15.00
For subscription information call Helm, Incorporated.
Without Portfolio: Includes Owner’s Manual.
1994PontiacTransSportWithoutPortfolio
. . .10260060 $10.00
CURRENT & PAST
MODEL
ORDER
FORMS
Address
all inquiries
to:
HELM,
INCORPORATED
Service Publications are available for current and past model Pontiac
EO. Box 07130
vehicles. To request an order form, please specifyyear and model
Detroit, MI 48207
name of vehicle.
For information and inquiries call: 1-800-782-4356
PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDER FORM
NOTE: Please complete form below (Print or Type) and MAIL TO:
Post Office Box 07130,Detroit, Michigan 48207
ORDER TOLL FREE
1-800-782-4356
(Monday-Friday 8:OO A.M.-6:00 P.M. EST)
(ATTENTION)
(CUSTOMER NAME)
(STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(STATE)
*Prices are subjectto change without notice
and without incurring obligation.
* pries to ba ann,,,nccd at a wer date, cell ,-800-782-4356 for furtherinformation.
Orders cannot be returned without prior authorization.
A restocking fee may apply.
(ZIPCODE)
NOTE TO CANADIANCUSTOMERS:All listed prices are quoted
in US. funds. Canadian residents are
to make checks
payable in U.8. funds. To cwer Canadian pastage, add
$11.50 plus theUS. Handling Charge. Requests for manuak
printed in French shouldbe directed to Canadian General Motors dealerships.
Pleasealow adequatetime for postal service.
285
. ..
.. .286
PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDER FORM
NOTE: Please complete form below (Print or Type) and MAIL TO:
Elm
Post Office Box 07130, Detroit, Michigan 48207
OIDER TOLL FREE
1-800-782-4356
(Monday-Friday 8:OO A.M.-6:00 P.M. EST)
ITEM DESCRIPTION
PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER
Service Manual
Owner's Manual In-Portfolio
Owner's Manual Without-Portfolio
S-9410-U
10260058
10260060
VEHICLE MODEL
YEAR
NAME
TOTAL PRICE
QTY.
3 .
Pontiac Trans Sport
TBA* *
1994
Sport 1994 Pontiac
Trans $15.00
Pontiac Trans S ~ o r t 1994
$10.00
TOTAL MATERIAL
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and [7 Check or Money
of the personto whose attention the shipment
should be sent.
also the name
Order payable to
USA. please writeto the above address for quotation. Helm, Inc. (USA
For purchases outside
funds only - do not
send cash.)
NAME)
,
0MasterCard
Discover
(CUSTOMER
(STREET ADDRESS-NO
P.O.
~
[7 VISA 0Card
m l
BOX NUMBERS)
NO.)
(APT.
Account
Number:
(CITY
CODE)
AREA
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO. CODE
(ZIP
(
(STATE)
-
i ~p u h
r c hi a z~
add 4% sales t a x ,
~
Handling
Charge
$4.00
~
Postage
Canadian
(See Note Below)
GRAND TOTAL
ml ml
Date mo/yr:
(CUSTOMER SIGNATURE)
*Prices are subject to change without notice
and without incurring obligation.
NOTE TO CANADIAN CUSTOMERS All listed prices are quoted inU.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make checks
*price to be announced at a later date. cell1-800-782-4356 fo, further information.
payable in US. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add
$11.50 plus IheUS.,Handling Charge. Requestsfor manuals
printed in Frenchshould be directed to Canadian General Motors dealershlps.
Orders cannot be returned without prior authorization.
A restocking fee may apply.
Please allow adequatetime for postal service.
287.
..
288
PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDER FORM
NOTE: Please complete form below (Print or Type) and MAIL TO:
KEEEJ
Post Office Box 07130,Detroit, Michigan 48207
ORDER TOLL FREE
1-800-782-4356
(Monday-Friday 8:OO A.M.-6:00 P.M. EST)
NAME)
(CUSTOMER
I
(STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(STATE)
*Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
(ZIP CODE)
NOTE TO CANADIANCUSTOMERS:All listedpricesare quoted inU.S. funds,Canadian
are to make
* *Price to be announced ata later date. Cell 1-800-782-4356 for furtherinformation. Payable
in U S fmds. To
Canadian postage,add$ll.!X PIIS the US. Handling Charge.Requestsfor manuals
printed in French should be directed
to Canadian GeneralMotors dealerships.
Orders cannotbe returned without prior aulhoriiation.
A restocking fee may apply.
Please allow adequate time for postalservice.
.i
290
PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDER FORM
NOTE: Please complete form below (Print or Type) and MAIL TO:
elm
Post Office Box 07130, Detroit, Michigan 48207
ORDER TOLL FREE
1-800-782-4356
(Monday-Friday 8:OO A.M.-6:00 P.M. EST)
PUBLICATIONFORM NUMBER
}
ITEM DESCRIPTION
I
S-9410-U
10260058
10260060
Service Manual
Owner’s Manual In-Portfolio
Owner’s Manual Without-Portfolio
VEHICLE MODEL
I YEAR
NAME
Pontiac Trans Sport
Pontiac Trans Sport
Pontiac Trans Sport
1
I
TOTAL MATERIALI
I
I
QTY.
EACH
PRICE
TOTAL
TBA’ *
1994
1994
1994
~
$15.00
$10.00
I
NOTE Dealers and Companies please provide dealer
or company name, and
Check or Money
also the nameof the personto whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Order payable to
USA. please wriie to the above address for quotation. Helm, Inc. (USA
For purchases outside
0
onlyfunds
- do not
send cash.)
(ATTENTION)
MasterCard
(CUSTOMER NAME)
(STREET
ADDRESS-NO
P.O.BOX NUMBERS)
NO.)
(APT.
Account
m
Number:
(Cnv)
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO. CODE
AREA
(STATE)
(
*Prices are subjectto change without noticeand without incurring obligation.
to be
at a
call,-800-782-4356 for funher
,
Orders cannot be returned without prior authorization.
A restocking fee may apply.
(ZIP CODE)
K
Expiration
Date molyr:
I
Michigan Purchasers
III
I
lm l m
m
Canadian Postage
(See Note Below)
GRAND TOTAL
I ml
I
1I
l m]
Check here i f your billing
address is different from your
shippingaddressshown.
] M (CUSTOMER SIGNATURE)
NOTE TO CANADIAN CUSTOMERS:All listed prices are quoted inUS. funds. Canadian residents are to make checks
payable in U.S. funds. To cover
Canadian
postage,
add
$1 1.50 plus
the
US.,
Handling
Charge.
Requests
for manuals
printed in French shouldbe directed toCanadian General Motors dealershtps.
Please allow adequatelime for postal service.
291
...
292
PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDER FORM
NOTE: Please complete form below (Print or wpe) and _MAILTO:
\
mm
Post Office Box 07130,Detroit Michi an 48207
I
I
I
I
I
I
GRAND TOTAL
I
I
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer
or company name, and
of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent.
also the name
For purchases outsideU.S.A. please writeto the above address
for quotation.
NAME)
TE)
I
(CUSTOMER
(STREET
ADDRESS-NO
P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
NO.)
(APT.
(CITY)
DAYTIME TELEPHONENO.
$%:
(
293
..294
.
,
PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDER FORM
NOTE: Please complete form below (Print or Type) and MAIL TO:
Post Office Box 07130, Detroit, Michigan 48207
ORDER TOLL FREE
1-800-782-4356
(Monday-Friday 8:OO A.M.-6:00 P.M. EST)
I
ITEM DESCRIPTION
PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER
I
*Prices are subjectto change without noticeand without incurring obligation.
* *Price to be announeedat a leter date. Call 1-800-782-4356 for further i n f m a t i m .
Orders cannot be returned without prior authorization.
A restocking fee may apply.
QTY.
VEHICLE MODEL
NAME
I
I
YEAR
NOTE TOCANADlAN CUSTOMERSA i listedprices a= quoted in U.S. MS. Canadian re;iidemare to
payable in Us. funds.TO COYBr Canadian postage,add$ll.5Oplusthe US. Handling Charge, Requestsfor
manuals
printed in French should be,direcfed
to Canadmn GeneralMotors dealerships.
Pleaseallow adequatetime torpostal service.
295..
.
ABS
(Anti-LockBrakes) . . . . . . . . 151
ABSWarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Accessory Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Adding
BrakeFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223. 268
Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . 71.72. 130. 243
Engine Cqolant . . 189. 2 19. 249. 268
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211. 268
Power Steering Fluid . 221.250. 269
SoundEquipment . . . . . . : . . . . . 130
Transaxle Fluid.
Automatic . . . . . . . . . 217.249. 269
Windshield Washer Fluid . . 222. 269
AdjustingRearSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
25
AirBag ........................
HowItWorks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
ReadinessLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Pontiac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 215. 251
AirConditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Air Inflator System . . . . . . . . . . . 95. 193
Alcohol. Driving Under the
Influence of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Alcohol in Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Alignment.Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Aluminum Wheels
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
146
Antenna ......................
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . 189.219.249. 268
Anti-Lock Brake System ......... 151
JunctionBlockFuse . . . . . . . . . . 247
WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Anti-Theft Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Chart ......................
242
Ashtrays & Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . 96. 99
Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
AM/FM Stereo Radio . . . . . . . . . 131
AM/FM Stereo Radio with
Cassette Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
AM/FM Stereo Radio with
Cassette Player and Graphic
Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
AM/FM Stereo Radio with
Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . 139
Care of Audio Systems . . . . . . . . 145
Delco-LOC Anti-Theft Feature . 141
. . 144
RadioReception.FortheBest
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Steering Wheel Touch Controls . . . . 143
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Automatic Transaxle
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . 2 17. 249. 269
Checking Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
73
Shifting .....................
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . 70. 71
Blowout.Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Brakes
ABS .......................
151
. . . . . . . . . . 114
ABSWarningLight
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223. 268
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
77
Parking .....................
PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
225
Replace ....................
Warning Lights . . . . . . . 113. 114. 152
Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
BrakeSystemWarning Light . . . . . . 113
Brakes.Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
151
Braking .......................
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . 154
“Break-In. New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 69
Brightness Intensity Control . . . . . . . 89
18
Buckling Up ....................
Bulb Replacement
252
Chart ......................
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226. 252
Taillight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227. 252
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
FrontTurn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Auto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Batteries. Remote Lock Control . . . . . 60
Rear LightBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
225. 304
Battery ....................
252
Taillight ....................
AcidWarning . . . . . . . . . . . 179.226
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 C D Player Anti-Theft Feature . . . . 141
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . 249
Blizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Carbon Monoxide in Exhaust . . . 68. 80
Block Heater. Engine . . . . . . . . . 72. 2 15 Cassette TapePlayer . . . . 133. 136. 145
.
BBB
297
a
CenterLapBelts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Certificationnire Label . . . . . . . . . . 228
Chains
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202. 235
Trailer Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Checking
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15
BrakeFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 189. 2 19
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 11
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . 221
Safety Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . 209
Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . 5 1
Transaxle Fluid
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 17
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . 241
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Child SecurityLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Circuit Breakermelay Panel . . . . . . . 247
Circuit Breakers & Fuses . . . . . . . . . 244
City Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Cleaner. Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15. 251
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Cassette Player and Tapes . . . . . . 145
Compact Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
236
Fabric .....................
Finish Care .................. 239
Foreign Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
238
Glass ......................
Inside of Your Pontiac . . . . . . . . 236
Leather or Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Outside of Your Pontiac . . . . . . . 239
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Special Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Top of Instrument Panel . . . . . . . 238
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . 24 1
Vinyl or Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . 236.238. 239
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
White Sidewall Tires . . . . . . . . . . 240
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . 239
ClimateControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Clock. Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Clusters. Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . 108
Collision Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1
Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Climate Control System . . . . . . . 123
Quick Reference Guide . . . . . . . . 120
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121.128
Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . 195. 202. 304
Compartment. Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Control. Loss of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Convex Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249. 268
Checking & Adding . . . . . . 189.219
Proper Mixture to Use . . . . 189. 22C
Safety Warnings
About . . . . . . . . . . . . 189.220. 22 1
Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Coolant Heater. Engine . . . . . . . 72.215
Cooling System . . . . 189.219.249. 304
:overs.Wheel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
h i s e Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
:up Holder .....................
99
ZustomerAssistanceInformation . . 274
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . 88
Dead Battery:What toDo . . . . . . . . 177
Defects. ReportingSafety . . . . . . . . 277
DefensiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
. . . . . . . . . 128
Defogger.RearWindow
DefoggingYourWindows . . . . . . . . 127
Dome Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89. 93
55
Door Locks .....................
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . 75.164.173
DriverPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Driving
At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
City .......................
161
Controlling a Skid . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Defensively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
162
Freeway ....................
HillandMountain . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
In a Foreign Country . . . . . . . . . . 208
In theRain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
LongDistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
LossofControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
On SnoworIce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
156
Passing ....................
Through Deep Standing Water . . . 72
WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Electrical Equipment.
Adding . . . . . . . . . . 71.72. 130. 243
Electric Outside Mirror Control . . . . . 97
ElectronicLevelControl . . . . . 104. 229
Emergencies.Braking in . . . . . . . . . 154
Emergencies on theRoad . . . . . . . . . 175
Emergencies. Steering in . . . . . . . . . 155
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
EmergencyTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . I8 1
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . 72. 2 15
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . 189. 2 19. 249
1 Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . 72. 215
EngineCoolantTemperatureGage . 113
EngineExhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
EngineIdentification . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
EngineOil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1. 268
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 14
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Checking & Adding . . . . . . . . . . 21 1
Disposing of Used Oil . . . . . . . . 2 15
Energy Conserving . . . . . . . 2 12. 2 13
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68. 90
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Oil Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 12
When to Change . . . . . 2 15.258. 260
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Engine Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 1
Engine.Starting . . . . . . . . . . 70. 71. 175
ERT AM/FM Stereo Radio with
Cassette Player and Graphic
Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13f
Ethanol in Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Exhaust
Dangerous Gas in . . . . . . . . . . 68. 8C
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 111
Parking with the Engine
Parked with the Engine
Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79. 80
Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79. 80
Zxpectant Mothers. Use of
Fuses
& Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . 244
Safety. Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3xpressway Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Zxtender. Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 G a g e s
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . 113
Zxterior Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Fuel ........................
111
Voltmeter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
112
Fabric Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
;an Warnings . . . . . . 178.179.187. 210 Gasoline
Gasoline
Tank,
Filling Your . . . . . . . 208
Zilling theFuelTank . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
. . . . . . . . . . 304
Gas
Station
Information
zilter.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . 73
3ear
Positions
Air . . . . . . . . . . . . 215.251.259. 261
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . 73
3earshift
Lever
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251.258.260
.....................
98
3love
Box
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
?lashers. Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . 176 3raphic Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Flooded Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71. 72 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 226. 252
HazardWarning Flashers . . . . . . . . . 176
Fluid
& Taillight.
Headlight
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223. 268
Removing
and Replacing . . . 226. 227
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Headlights
....................
226
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . 221. 269
High-Low
Beam
Changer
.
.
.
.
.
.
88
Transaxle . . . . . . . 2 17.249.269. 304
“On”
Reminder
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
88
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . 222. 269
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Fluids & Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Replacement
Bulbs . . . . . . . 226. 252
Freeway Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Head
Restraint
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
207. 304
Hearing
or
Speech
Impaired . . . . . . 275
Alcohol in Fuel . . . . . . . . . . 207. 208
Heater
........................
121
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
.........
72.
215
Heater.
Engine
Block
Exhaust Warnings . . . . . . . . . . 68. 8C
Filling YourTank . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Heater. Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 72. 215
Fuels with Alcohol . . . . . . . . . . . 20i High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88. 159
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
In Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . 201; Hilland Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . 164
I
299.
HoodRelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209.304
Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 10
Warning.OverheatedEngine . . . 186
Horn ..........................
81
Hot Engine. Safety
Warnings . . . . . . . . . 113186.188.189
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160.22 1
Identification
Engine .....................
243
Label. Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . 243
Number.Vehicle (VIN Code) . . . 243
Idling Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 74. 79
If You’re Stuck: In Sand. Mud.
Ice. or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Ignition
Key ........................
54
IlluminatedEntrySystem . . . . . . . 61
Positions ....................
69
Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Inflation. Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . 108
InstrumentPanel Intensity Control . . 89
Instrument Panel Warning Lights . . . 110
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . ; . . . . . . . . 93
Control .....................
89
FrontReading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Override Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Rear Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Jack. Tire ....................
...300
194
lump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 2oadingYourVehicle . . . . . . . 104.228
Electronic Level Control . . . . . . . 229
JunctionBlockFuseABS
. . . . . . . . 247
Locks
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Keyless Entry. Remote . . . . . . . . . . 58
55
Door .......................
Key in Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
56
Power
Door
. . . . . . . . . . . . 58
KeylessEntrySystem
.....................
58
Remote
Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Long
Distance
Driving
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
162
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
54 Low Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Keys ..........................
LowFuelWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
L a n e Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Low Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Low TractionLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Lap-Shoulder Belt
Front ....................
22.30 Lubricants and Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
31 LuggageCarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Rear ........................
Use byChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Leather. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Maintenance
Fluids & Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . 268
Level Control. Electronic . . . . . . . . . 104
MaterialsChart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
67
Liftgate ........................
270
Record .....................
AjarWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . 116
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
251.
252
Replacement
Parts
99
Lighter ........................
Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257.262
Lights
Services.Scheduled . . . . . . . . . . 257
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89.93
WhenTrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . 257
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . 88
. . . . . . 116
93 MalfunctionIndicatorLamp
Dome ......................
Low Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 ManualFrontSeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Low Traction Warning . . . . . . . . 115 MasterCylinder.Brake . . . . . . . . . . 223
“On” Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Methanol in Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
93 MileageIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Reading .....................
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Mirrors
Convex Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Safety BeltReminder . . . . . . . . . . 21
InsideManual Daymight . . . . . . . 96
Taillights ....................
227
Manual Remote Control . . . . . . . . 97
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Power
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . 97
Under Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Visor
Vanity
WarningLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
’
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Park. Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
PassengerBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30. 31
N e t . Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Passing .......................
156
New Vehicle “Break-In”
. . . . . . . . . . . 239
PolishingandWaxing
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Power Accessory Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . 94
NightDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Octane Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 207 Power Outlet.Accessory . . . . . . . . . . 94
109 Power Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Odometer .....................
Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Power Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Oil. Engine . . . . . . . . 21 1.262.268. 304 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . 221.269
2 12 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82.248
Quality ....................
Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 12 Pregnancy. Use ofSafety
UsedOil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15 BeltsDuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
When to Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15 Problemsonthe Road . . . . . . . . . . . 175
OilPressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Oil Pressure Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 PulseWindshieldWipers . . . . . . . . . . 90
OperationofLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
OutsideRearviewMirrors . . . . . . . . . 96 Radiator Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Overdrive.Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Radiator Pressure Cap . . . . . . . 190. 22 1
OverheatedEngine . . . . . . . . . . 186. 188 Radio ........................
131
Overheated Engine Coolant
Rain.Drivinginthe . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Gage .......................
113 Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
RearAirVents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
P a i n t ...........................
MountainDriving
RearWindowDefogger . . . . . . . . . . 128
Rear Window Wiper and Washer . . . . 90
RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Reminder Lights. Safety Belt . . . . . . . 21
Remote ControlMirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Remote KeylessEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Remote Positive Battery Terminal . . 179
Removable RearBucket Seats . . . . . . 16
ReplacementBulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
ReplacementFuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
ReplacingBrakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Replacing Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Replacing Seat and Restraint System
Parts Aftera Crash . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.5 2
Replacing Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Replacing Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Replacing Windshield Wiper
Blades ......................
228
ReportingSafetyDefects . . . . . . . . . 277
Restraints.Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Restraint.Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
. . . . . . . . 164
Roads.HillandMountain
RoadsideAssistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Rocking YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Stuck.If You Are . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Rotation.Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
RunningLights.Daytime . . . . . . . . . . 88
Rear Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
ChemicalSpotting . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1 RearFan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122. 126
FinishCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Seats
FinishDamage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Rear
Adjusting ....................
15
Parking
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
Dump
and
Stow
Feature
AtNight ....................
62
Removing
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
1.
12.
14
174
OnHills ....................
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . 80
ThirdRowEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Saddlebags
With the Engine Running . . . . 79. 80 Rear Storage Compartment . . . . . . . 100 Safety Belts
ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
301
Adults ......................
21
Built-InChild Restraint . . . . . . . . 37
Center Lap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
33
Checking ....................
35
Children ....................
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Child Restraints. Where to Put . . . 43
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
51
Extender ....................
How to Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Larger Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Passenger Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Pregnancy. Use During . . . . . . . . . 30
Questions & Answers . . . 20. 23.24. 25
Rear SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Reminder Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1
RightFront.AdultPassenger . . . . 30
Smaller ChildrenandBabies . . . . 36
Top Strap ....................
44
Torn . . . . . . . . . . . . ;. . . . . . . . . . . 51
Twisted .....................
25
Vehicles First Sold in Canada . . . . . 2
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17. 2 1
Why You Should Wear Safety
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17. 20
Safety Chains (Trailer) . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Safety Defects.Reporting . . . . . . . . 277
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . 257
17
Seat Belts ......................
8
Seat Controls ....................
Head Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Manual Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
.
302
Manual RecliningSeatback . . . . . . 9
Power Seat.Six-Way . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Reclining Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Rear Seats
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . 11. 12.14
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
ThirdRowEntry . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Seats ...........................
8
"Service Engine Soon" Light . . . . . . 116
Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Service Parts Identification Label . . 243
Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Service Publications Order Form . . . 285
Service StationInformation . . . . . . . 304
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Pontiac .......................
29
Setting theClock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Setting the Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . 110
Shifting Into P (Park) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Shifting the Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Signaling Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
158
Skidding ......................
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
132Door AjarWarning
Player
Sliding
Light . . 117
Sliding Door Child Security Lock . . . 66
Snowstorm. If You're Caught in a . . 167
Sound Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . 130
Sound Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Spare Tire. Compact . . . . . 195. 202. 304
SparkPlugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . 249
Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Stains.Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Starting YourEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Starting Your Vehicle if the Battery
is Dead .......................
177
Steering
In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
. . . . . . . . . . 156
Off-RoadRecovery
Tips .......................
154
Steering Wheel Audio Touch
Controls .....................
143
SteeringWheel,Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
StereoSoundSystems . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Storage
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
. . . . . . . . . . . 107
FrontSeatConsole
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
RearStorageCompartment . . . . . 100
Storing YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Stuck. If You Are . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
104
Sunroof .......................
98
SunVisors .....................
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Taillight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87. 227
"
....................
Tape
Technical Facts & Specifications
Bulbs .......................
252
Electrical Equipment.
Add-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71.243
EngineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . 251
Fluid Capacities & Types . . . . . . 249
Fuses & CircuitBreakers . . . . . . 244
ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Service Parts Identification
Label .....................
243
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) .....................
243
TemperatureGage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 13
Theft ..........................
61
22 1
Thermostat ....................
Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1
Time.Settingthe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
230
Tires .........................
Buying New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
CertificationEire Label . . . . . . . 228
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202. 235
Flat.Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193. 230
Inspection & Rotation . . . . . . . . . 231
Loading .....................
228
230
Pressure ....................
QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Spare.Compact . . . . . . . . . . 195.202
Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Wheel Alignment & Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
WheelReplacement . . . . . . . . . . 234
WhentoReplaceWheels . . . . . . 234
Top Strap ......................
44
79
TorqueLock ....................
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
TowingYour Pontiac . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
TractionControl . . . . . . . . . . . . 115. 153
TractionControlWarningLights . . . 115
TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Driving with a Trailer . . . . . . . . . 172
171
Hitches ....................
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Low Fuel ....................
1 11
LowTraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Parking onHills . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 116
Trailer Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Oil Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . 116
Transaxle. Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Sliding DoorAjar . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
TractionControl . . . . i . . . . . . . . 115
TurnSignal Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . 82 Washer.Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
High-Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 88 Weight
Pulse WindshieldWipers . . . . . . . 90
Gross Axle Weight Rating
Turn & Lane Change Indicator ... 82
(GAWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
WindshieldWasher . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) ....................
228
WindshieldWipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Wheel Alignment & Tire Balance . . 234
Underhood Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 11 Wheel Covers. Howto Remove . . . . 196
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 WheelNuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199. 200
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Windows
Vehicle Identification Number
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
(VIN) .......................
243
Standard ....................
81
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 WindshieldWasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92.222. 269
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121.128
243 Windshield Wiper Blade
VIN .........................
VisorVanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Voltmeter .....................
112 WindshieldWipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
W a r n i n g Flashers. Hazard . . . . . . . 176 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
IfYou’re Caught in a Blizzard . . 167
Warning Lights
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
. . . . . . 114
Anti-LockBrakeSystem
DeepSnow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
113
Brake ......................
Wrecker
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Liftgate Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
303
..
Service Station Information
Hood Release
Battery
See Page 209
The Delco Freedom@battery
needs no water. See Page 225
Windshield Washer Fluid
Y
See Page 222
Cooling System
Check and add coolantonly at the
coolant recovery tank. The fluid
should be at the FULL HOT
mark when the engine is warm.
See Page 220
Transaxle Fluid
See Page 217
Engine Oil
See Page 211
Cold Tire Pressure\
111 I I
See Certificationnire Label on
inside edge of driver’s door.
See Page 228
Fuel
Capacity 20 U.S. Gal. (76 L)
Use unleaded gas only,
87 Octane or higher.
See Page 207
Spare Tire Pressure
Compact Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa)
See Page 202

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement